GEOTRAINET TRAINING MANUAL FOR

DESIGNERS OF SHALLOW
GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

Geo-Education for a sustainable geothermal heating and cooling market

Project: IEE/07/581/S12.499061
www.geotrainet.eu
This manual for Designers of Ground Source Heat Pumps (GSHP) is one of the deliverables from
„GEOTRAINET: Geo-Education for a sustainable geothermal heating and cooling market‟. This project
is supported by Intelligent Energy – Europe and took place from September 2008 to February 2011.

Ground Source Heat Pumps already make an important contribution to energy saving and emission
reduction and have the potential to make an even greater contribution in the future. Research in Europe
shows that one of the barriers to a sustainable and growing geothermal market is the lack of
appropriately skilled personnel. Moreover, the quality of design and application are not always
satisfactory. The objective of this project is to develop a professionally-oriented European education
programme (training courses and associated materials such as this manual) to support the geothermal
heating and cooling market. There are a number of different groups of professionals involved in a GSHP
installation. The GEOTRAINET project is focused on two target groups: Designers (those who carry out
feasibility and design studies, including geology) and Drillers (who make the boreholes and insert the
tubes). The project has produced an education programme comprising curricula, didactic materials,
training courses and an e-leaning platform.

The present manual forms the didactic material for designers. It is based on the curricula developed in
the GEOTRAINET framework. An international platform of experts on Geothermal Energy Heating and
Cooling was established to provide the knowledge required for developing and delivering the teaching
and supporting didactic materials for both of the target groups. This group of experts was drawn from
professionals with the full range of qualifications and experience relevant to the GSHP sector. The
expert platforms created provide a complete vision of the curricula necessary for designers and drillers.
By working together, experts from different countries have provided a rich exchange of practice between
the countries.

During the two and a half years of the GEOTRAINET project, ten courses have been delivered to a total
of 380 participants. In the context of the European Directive on promotion of the use of energy from
renewable sources, there is a very high demand for training courses in all EU countries. The first two
GEOTRAINET courses were oriented to prepare trainers in Europe; there were also four courses for
Designers and four courses for Drillers delivered by the trainers and members of the expert platform.
The involvement of participants from different countries and with a range of experience and
qualifications has provided an authoritative forum for the GSHP sector. The feedback of the participants
in the courses has allowed refinement and improvement of the course programmes, and consequently
the didactic material presented in this manual, which has been a living draft throughout the project.

The continuity of GEOTRAINET training activity will be assured through the establishment of a
European Education Committee. This committee will coordinate national training activity based on the
GEOTRAINET education programmes. This manual is intended to provide relevant and accessible
support for the ongoing education of European GSHP Designers.

Dr. Isabel M. Fernandez Fuentes, EurGeol.

GEOTRAINET Project Coordinator, European Federation of Geologists

GEOTRAINET GSHP 2 Manual for Designers

 GEOTRAINET TRAINING MANUAL FOR
DESIGNERS OF SHALLOW
GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

Geo-Education for a

sustainable geothermal

heating and cooling market

Project: IEE/07/581/SI2.499061

Compiled and edited by Dr. Maureen Mc Corry with EurGeol. Gareth Ll. Jones

Published by GEOTRAINET, EFG, Brussels 2011

This manual is designed to be part of a geothermal training course with practical

demonstration and experience. The Manual is produced by GEOTRAINET. It is supported by

Intelligent Energy Europe, but does not necessarily reflect the views of IEE.

© GEOTRAINET, EFG, BRUSSELS, 2011

ISBN No. 978-2-9601071-0-4

GEOTRAINET GSHP 3 Manual for Designers

 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

This Manual was produced as the result of the IEE-funded GEOTRAINET project
IEE/07/581/SI2.499061. We are particularly grateful to the trainees who attended the various
training courses and contributed to the continuing development of the manual throughout the
course of the project. We would also like to thank the following geothermal experts for their
contribution to the development of this training manual:

PARTNERS
European Federation of Geologists: Isabel Fernandez Fuentes (Project Coordinator), Ruth
Allington (GWP), Manuel Regueiro (ICOG), Dirk De Coster (VDC MILIEU ADVIES), David
Norbury (David Norbury Ltd.), Iñigo Arrizabalaga (TELUR), Jorge Garcia (Webmaster).

European Geothermal Energy Council: Philippe Dumas, Burkhard Sanner, Walter J Eugster
(POLYDYNAMICS), Jörg Uhde.

Arsenal Research, Austria: Marcello Farabegoli, Stefan Stumpf, Gundula Tschernigg,

Christine Lengauer.

BRGM, France: Florence Jaudin, Pascal Monnot.

GT Skills, Ireland: Gareth Ll. Jones, Paul Sikora (ECOCUTE), Padraig Briody (BRIODY),
Roisin Goodman (SLR), Maureen McCorry.

Romanian Geoexchange Society, Romania: Doinita Cucueteanu, Radu Polizu, Alex

Aposteanu, Robert Gavriliuc (UTCB).

ASA Geoexchange, Romania: Radu Hanganu-Cucu.

Universidad Politécnica de Valencia, Spain: Javier F. Urchueguía.

University of Lund, Sweden: Olof Andersson (SWECO), Göran Hellström, Kjell Carlsson
(GEOBORR GEOENERGI).

Newcastle University, UK: David Banks (HOLYMOOR), Cath Gandy, Adam Jarvis.

We are grateful to the following reviewers:

Olof Andersson, Iñigo Arrizabalaga, David Banks, Padraig Briody, Doinita Cucueteanu, Walter
J. Eugster, Cath Gandy, Florence Jaudin, Gareth Ll. Jones, David Norbury, Radu Polizu,
Burkhard Sanner, Paul Sikora and Javier Urchueguía.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 4 Manual for Designers

 CONTENTS
SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 1 Overview of shallow geothermal systems … Burkhard Sanner 7
CHAPTER 2 Limitations … Olof Andersson 15
CHAPTER 3 Concept and feasibility studies … Burkhard Sanner 21
SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 4 Ground heat transfer… Burkhard Sanner 25
CHAPTER 5 Design criteria … Walter J. Eugster 29
CHAPTER 6 Borehole heat exchangers … Göran Hellström 31
SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 7 Geology … Iñigo Arrizabalaga 53
CHAPTER 8 Drilling … Iñigo Arrizabalaga 61
CHAPTER 9 Site investigation (ground conditions/licences and permits) 71
… David Banks
SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10 Heat pump technology … Javier Urchueguía and Paul Sikora 93
CHAPTER 11 Energy load … Javier Urchueguía and Paul Sikora 107
SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 12 Design of borehole heat exchangers … Burkhard Sanner 121
CHAPTER 13 BHE design examples 123
… Burkhard Sanner, Radu Polizu and Radu Hanganu-Cucu
CHAPTER 14 Design of horizontal collectors 133
… Paul Sikora and Javier Urchueguía
SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 15 Installation and grouting ... Walter J. Eugster 139
CHAPTER 16 Functional and quality control … Walter J. Eugster 145
SECTION G. REGULATION
CHAPTER 17 European legal situation and standards 153
… David Norbury with Burkhard Sanner

CHAPTER 18 Energy efficiency building codes … Radu Polizu 167

CHAPTER 19 Environmental issues … Burkhard Sanner 185

GEOTRAINET GSHP 5 Manual for Designers

LIST OF AUTHORS

Burkhard Sanner, EGEC, [email protected]

Olof Andersson, SWECO, Sweden, [email protected]
Walter J. Eugster, Polydynamics, Switzerland, [email protected]
Göran Hellström, University of Lund, Sweden, [email protected]
Iñigo Arrizabalaga, Telur Geotermia y Agua, S.A., Spain, [email protected]
David Banks, Newcastle University, United Kingdom, [email protected]
Javier F. Urchueguía, Universidad Politécnica de Valencia, Spain, [email protected]
Paul Sikora, Ecocute Ltd., Ireland, [email protected]
David Norbury, David Norbury Limited, UK, [email protected]

Radu Polizu, ASA Geoexchange, [email protected]

Radu Hanganu-Cucu, Romania Geoexchange Society, [email protected]

REFERENCING

It is recommended that the following reference systems are used:

McCorry, M., Jones, G.Ll. (eds) 2011. Geotrainet Training Manual for Designers of Shallow
Geothermal Systems. Geotrainet, European Federation of Geologists, Brussels. 192pp.

Sanner B. 2011. Overview of shallow geothermal systems. In: McCorry, M., Jones, G. Ll.
(eds) 2011. Geotrainet Training Manual for Designers of Shallow Geothermal Systems.
Geotrainet, European Federation of Geologists, Brussels. 7-14

DISCLAIMER

The publisher and editors of, and contributors to, this Manual do not warrant that the contents
are complete or accurate in all respects. They make this Manual available on the basis that
they will not be held responsible for any liabilities arising from any act or omission from the
contents.

COVER

Front cover pictures clockwise from top: Vista Health Care Clinic, Naas, Co. Kildare, Ireland, 400kW
open loop system; BHE insertion from a reel, Switzerland; Diagramatic representation of an open loop
borehole system; Shallow geothermal borehole drilling for a domestic dwelling, Co. Cork, Ireland.

Back cover picture: The building is a marketing and dispatch centre for organic food in Upper Austria,
and is heated and air-conditioned by two water-water-heat pumps on groundwater wells. © Ochsner

GEOTRAINET GSHP 6 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 1

OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS by Burkhard Sanner

I. INTRODUCTION

Geothermal energy, in the public‟s perception, is often associated with volcanoes and
geysers. However, beside these spectacular manifestations, there is also a more modest side
of geothermal energy. The geothermal heat flow from the deeper crust to the surface normally
cannot be felt by human beings, although it reaches about 40 TW of thermal output,
eventually radiated into outer space. On the way down into the deeper layers of our planet,
temperature rises by 3 K per 100 m of depth on average, with a doubling or tripling of this rate
at geothermal anomalies.

A clear definition for geothermal energy was badly needed both for the technical as well as for
the administrative and regulatory side of geothermal energy use. Based upon German
practice, the European Geothermal Energy Council (EGEC) adopted a definition giving only
the surface of the solid earth as a boundary for geothermal. Since July 2009, this definition is
for the first time stated in the EU legislative framework; EU Directive 2009/28/EC on
Promotion of Renewable Energy Sources reads:
Art. 2:
The following definitions also apply:
(c) “geothermal energy” means energy stored in form of heat beneath the
surface of solid earth.
The distinction between shallow and deep geothermal is not fixed. Historically a depth of ca.
400 m is used, going back to a Swiss support scheme from the 1980s. In general, shallow
geothermal systems can be considered as those not pursuing the higher temperatures
typically found only at greater depth, but applying technical solutions to make use of the
relatively low temperatures offered in the uppermost 100 m or more of the Earth´s crust. In
North America, shallow geothermal technology is also known under the term “geoexchange”.
For shallow geothermal, the undisturbed ground temperature that forms the basis of heat
extraction or heat injection varies between <2 °C and >20 °C, depending upon the climatic
condition of the region and the depth of the borehole.
To use the constant, low temperatures of the ground, there are two options:

 Increase or decrease the temperature of geothermal heat to a usable level using heat
pumps (Ground Source Heat Pumps, GSHP)

 Increase or decrease the temperature in the ground by storing heat or extracting heat
(Underground Thermal Energy Storage, UTES).

GEOTRAINET GSHP 7 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

0
0

1 January November
July 10
2 March
May
September
3 20
4
5 30

6
40
7
8 50
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Temperature [°C]
60
0
2 January
July 70
4
April October
6 80
8
90
10
12 100
14 Data from 1988
16
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 6 8 10 12 14 16
Temperature [°C] Temperatur [°C]

Figure 1. Constant temperature in the “Neutral Zone” at 10-20 m depth development, and
temperature development down to 100 m depth (anticlockwise from top left):
measured at Royal Edinburgh Observatory, average 1838-1854 (after data from Everett, 1860);
measured at the Borehole Heat Exchanger field test station Schwalbach, Germany;
before a TRT in Germany, 2007 (courtesy of UBeG GbR)

The various shallow geothermal methods to transfer heat out of or into the ground comprise:

• Horizontal ground heat exchangers 1.2 - 2.0 m depth (horizontal loops)

• borehole heat exchangers 10 - 250 m depth (vertical loops)

• energy piles 5 - 45 m depth

• ground water wells 4 - >50 m depth

• water from mines and tunnels
Methods using a heat exchanger inside the ground are also called “closed” systems, methods
producing water from the ground and having a heat exchanger (e.g. the evaporator) above
ground are called “open” systems. Schematics of these methods are shown in Figure 2 and
some advantages and disadvantages of closed and open systems are listed in Table 1.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 8 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

groundwater
level

Pump

Figure 2. Schematic diagram of the most common ground-coupling methods (from left):
horizontal loops, BHE (vertical loops), and groundwater wells

Groundwater wells Borehole Heat Exchangers (BHE)

Heat transport from ground to well or vice versa Heat transport from ground to BHE or vice versa
by pressure difference (pumping) by temperature difference
Advantage: Advantage:
• high capacity with relatively low cost • no regular maintenance
• relatively high temperature level of heat • safe
source / low level of cold source • can be used virtually everywhere
Disadvantage: Disadvantage:
• maintenance of well(s) • limited capacity per borehole
• requires aquifer with sufficient yield • relatively low temperature level of heat
• water chemistry needs to be investigated source / high level of cold source

Table 1. Basic heat transport criteria and advantages/disadvantages associated with open or
closed systems

While Figure 2 shows the exterior form of different ground coupling options, Figure 3 details
the internal arrangements possible for closed shallow geothermal systems. They differ in the
type of heat carrier medium inside the ground circuit, and in the way this circuit is coupled to
the heat pump refrigeration cycle. The most common set-up is the use of a fluid as heat
carrier (typically water with the addition of an antifreeze agent), which is circulated through the
ground loop by pumping.
Direct expansion systems are characterized by the extension of the refrigeration cycle into the
ground loop, i.e. the heat carrier is the working medium of the heat pump, and a two-phase-
flow (liquid/steam) occurs inside the ground loop. In practice, direct expansion (DX) has been
applied successfully to GSHP with horizontal loop, while the combination with vertical loops
resulted in problems with compressor oil return, etc. The advantage of DX lies in the absence
of a circulation pump and of heat exchange losses between ground circuit and refrigeration

GEOTRAINET GSHP 9 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

circuit; however, some of the power for circulating the refrigerant through the ground loop has
to be provided by the heat pump compressor.
Heat pipes make use of a two-phase system inside a single, vertical pipe. The working
medium with low boiling point is evaporated by the Earth‟s heat in the lower section of the
pipe. The resulting steam rises to the top of the pipe due to its lower density, and transfers the
heat to the refrigeration circuit via a heat exchanger. The steam thus cools down and
condenses again, flowing back in liquid form on the pipe wall towards the bottom of the pipe.
While both the brine systems and the DX systems can be used both for heating and cooling,
the heat pipe is suitable for heating purposes only, as no heat can be transported down into
the ground (the driving force is provided by gravity, which works only in one direction).

circulation heat pump

pump

1: 2: 3:
Ground circuit Refrigerant Heating
(water, brine) circuit circuit

Figure 3. Possible ground loop

circuits: fluid (brine) circuit for vertical
and for horizontal loops (upper and
circulation heat pump middle left), heat pipe circuit for
pump
vertical loop (lower left) and direct

horizontal loop
expansion (DX) circuit for horizontal
1: 2: 3:
Ground circuit Refrigerant Heating loop (lower right)
(water, brine) circuit circuit

heat pump

heat
exchanger
1: 2: 3:
Heat Pipe Refrigerant Heating heat pump
circuit circuit circuit

horizontal loop
1: 2:
Ground and Heating
refrigerant circuit circuit

The earliest example for GSHP in literature dates from 1945 in Indianapolis, USA, and
concerns a DX system with horizontal loops (Crandall, 1945). Already in 1947 an article by
Kemler presented all the basic GSHP configurations we use today. In Europe (Austria,
Germany, Sweden, Switzerland) the first GSHP with groundwater wells and the first horizontal
loops appeared around 1970, and the first BHE before 1980.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 10 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

After a short boom in these countries around 1980, associated with the second oil price crisis,
the development in Europe was slow throughout the 1980s and 1990s, with the exception of

70 100

90
60
number of HP sold per year (*1000)

80
50

geothermal share (%)

70

60
40
50
Air
30
40
Geothermal
20 % GSHP 30

20
10
10

0 0
78

80

82

84

86

88

90

92

94

96

98

00

02

04

06

08
19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

20

20

20

20

20
Figure 4. Development of heat pump sales in Germany (after data from BWP and GtV-BV)

80 80

70 Air source 70
Ground source
Heat pump units sold (x1000)

60 60
2006
50 50
2007
40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0
ay
en

UK
y

d
nd

ly
ce

ria
an

an

Ita

rw
an
ed

la
st
m

nl
Au

er

No
Sw

Fr
er

Fi
itz
G

Sw

Figure 5. Heat pump sales for 2006 and 2007 in some European countries (after data from
EHPA)

Sweden and Switzerland. Since about 2000 a strong market development can be seen in
Germany (Fig. 4), followed by France, and now in 2010 the GSHP technology has spread to
all EU countries. Figure 5 shows the heat pump units sold in some European countries in
2006 and in 2007, giving a high share for GSHP in colder regions, and a majority for air-
source heat pumps in warmer lands (France, Italy).

GEOTRAINET GSHP 11 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

All material for GSHP today is available from manufacturers, in proven quality: pre-fabricated
BHE, grouting material, pipes, manifolds, heat pumps (Fig. 6). Methods for determining the
ground parameters (thermal and hydraulic) are available (Fig. 7), design rules and calculation
methods have been developed, and guidelines and standards set the frame for reliable and
durable installations.

Figure 6. Examples of products for GSHP: pre-fabricated BHE, tested and delivered to the
drilling site (Photos left: Haka, centre: Rehau)

12
Base load
10 Peak cool load
8 Peak heat load
Fluid temperature [ºC]

6
4
2
0
-2
-4
-6
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Year 25

Figure 7. Example of Thermal Response Test for determining ground parameters (left) and
calculation of BHE layout using EED software (right)

A useful tool for comparing different installations of BHE is the specific heat extraction rate.
This is the maximum thermal capacity at the heat pump evaporator (refrigeration capacity),
divided by the total length of BHE, given in Watt per Meter BHE length (W/m). In the early
years of BHE in Europe around 1980, a value of 50 W/m was given as a standard value for
Germany, and 55 W/m for Switzerland. These values were used for design of residential
GSHP at that time – and 50 W/m is still used as a crude rule of thumb for many smaller
installations today! However, the actual specific heat extraction possible in a certain project
depends strongly upon ground conditions (thermal conductivity), system requirements

GEOTRAINET GSHP 12 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

(operating hours), system size (number and distance of BHE, interference), etc. (Sanner,
1999). So a BHE system never should be designed following a rule of 50 W/m of heat
extraction, and the specific heat extraction value only used for comparison after a thorough
design calculation has been made.
In recent times, claims by manufacturers of some new BHE types have been made for
achieving specific heat extraction values of more than 100 W/m (apparently independent of
any thermal properties of the underground). Using a simple consideration allows the viability
of such claims to be checked.
The heat transport in a BHE system can be divided into two stages:
 the transport in the undisturbed ground around the borehole (controlled mainly by the
thermal conductivity of the ground k)
 the transport from the borehole wall into the fluid inside the pipes, controlled by the
type of grouting, the pipe material, the borehole and pipe geometry, etc., and given as
a summary parameter rb (borehole thermal resistance).

100 100
heat pump heating capacity 10 kW
90 rock thermal conductivity λ = 2,5 W/m/K 90

80 80
specific heat extraction (W/m)

Hellström-Efficiency (%)
70 1 BHE 70
ηH metal, triple-U,
60 60
thermal grout
PE, double-U,
50 50
PE, double-U, thermal grout
40 normal grout, 40
PE, single- or single-U,
30 U, normal thermal grout 30
grout
20 20

10 10

0 0
0,25 0,20 0,15 0,10 0,05 0,00
rb K/(W*m)

Figure 8. Specific heat extraction rates (brown curve) and Hellström-Efficiencies (orange
curve) as a function of borehole resistance of different BHE types in a typical single-family
house under average ground conditions; with the chosen parameters, the maximum heat
extraction rate at a theoretical maximum ηH = 100 cannot exceed ca. 85 W/m

The specific heat extraction rate of a BHE can only be calculated for a certain installation,
taking into account all the parameters mentioned above. A new design of BHE claiming an
improvement can only influence the parameters inside the borehole, resulting in a lower value
for rb. The best BHE would be a system with r b = 0 K(W/m), i.e. a spontaneous heat transfer
between borehole wall and fluid. This can be achieved only theoretically, but can act as a
benchmark for determining the efficiency of an actual BHE system. This efficiency is called
Hellström-Efficiency and is given as:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 13 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF SHALLOW GEOTHERMAL SYSTEMS

ηH = sustainable heat extraction possible in a certain project/heat extraction with rb = 0

where: ηH = 100 for the theoretical maximum (Fig. 8).

II. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography

Crandall, A.C. 1946. House Heating with Earth Heat Pump. Electrical World 126/19, 94-95,
New York.

Everett, J.D. 1860. On a method of reducing observations of underground temperatures.

Trans. Royal Society Edinburgh, Vol. XXII, Part II, 429-439, Edinburgh.

Kemler, E.N. 1947. Methods of Earth Heat Recovery for the Heat Pump. Heating and
Ventilating, Sept. 1947, 69-72, New York.

Sanner, B. 1999. Kann man Erdwärmesonden mit Hilfe von spezifischen Entzugsleistungen
auslegen? Geothermische Energie 26-27/99, 1-4, Geeste.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 14 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 2

LIMITATIONS by Olof Andersson

I. INTRODUCTION
As is shown in the previous chapter, there are several different shallow geothermal systems
available on the commercial market. These are, in short, ground source heat pumps (GSHP)
for extraction of heat (and cold), and underground thermal energy storage (UTES) for active
storage of heat and/or cold. This chapter considers the potential of these systems as well as
limiting conditions when it comes to apply them in practice.

The potential is in many ways related to local or site specific conditions, not only climate and
geology, but also the sector of application. The latter may be family houses, commercial and
institutional buildings, district heating and cooling systems, or even industrial facilities. These
all represent very different size and load characteristics in the design of a geothermal system.
The limitations can be looked upon as the outer boundary conditions that lead to a go or a no-
go for project concept. They can be physical, such as climate and geological circumstances,
but may also be connected to other site conditions, for example ground availability or other
interests for ground use. Country specific, there are also a lot of other potential limitations.
These could be of a social, cultural or political nature, but more often economical or legal.
However, these limitations are flexible and may disqualify one type of system, but allow
another. It is of great importance that all potential limitations are considered early (at the
feasibility stage) in any project.

II. WHY SHOULD DESIGNERS AND DRILLERS CARE ABOUT A PROPER FEASIBILITY
STUDY?

Properly done, any GSHP project should start up with a feasibility study. The reason for this is
to create a basis for decision on how the project should be further developed. In this stage the
project plan should be checked against all types of technical, economical, legal and
environmental constraints that may affect the design and finalization. If a designer or a driller
is not aware of the constraints and limitations, then there is a risk that a GSHP concept may
turn out to be not feasible, at a late stage. This will of course lead to a dead investment for the
customer and unnecessary claims on anybody involved in the realization of the plant. It may
also seriously damage the reputation of and confidence for these types of systems, something
that has to be avoided.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 15 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 2 LIMITATIONS

III. POTENTIAL ASPECTS

The two main renewable heat (or cold) extractions from shallow-lying geological strata are
shown in Figure 1. Solar energy is the driving force of the hydrological cycle and indeed for
processes that are the basis for traditional renewable energy, such as hydropower, wind and
biomass.

Solar radiation

Geothermal
heat flow

Figure 1. In the hydrological cycle all traditional renewable energy sources can be found. The
geothermal heat flow is another renewable source
2
The average solar radiation that is adsorbed by the ground is in the order of 1500 kWh/m
2
annually, while the geothermal heat flow is restricted to some 0.6 kWh/m . In practice, this
means that the major portion of extracted heat from the shallow underground is derived from
solar energy, rather than geothermal heat from below. This basic knowledge, on how heat
transfer in the underground works, suggests that shallow geothermal applications can be
regarded as solar energy. For this reason the potential is huge and almost unlimited.
However, putting single closed loop vertical systems too close to each other will lead to
continuous chill down of the underground. Depending on geological and climate conditions
and how much energy is extracted, the “safe” distance varies between 20 and 30 m.
Under normal conditions, the temperature at a depth of approximately 10 m reflects the
average temperature in the air (+14.3 on average). However, at places with snow in the
winter, the ground temperature will be a few degrees higher since the snow will insulate the

GEOTRAINET GSHP 16 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 2 LIMITATIONS

surface. At greater depths, the ground temperature will increase due to thermal heat flow.
o
This flow creates a geothermal gradient that on average is around 3 C/100 m. In countries
with old crystalline rocks, the gradient is often much less, while countries with clayey rocks
2
have a higher gradient. The heat flow represents around 0.07 W/m . However, the variation is
rather large and depends greatly on geographical position and local geological conditions.

IV. LIMITATIONS AND BOUNDARIES

IV. 1. Technical limitations

It has been shown in the preceeding section that the natural sources for GSHP systems
(atmospheric and geothermal energy) are practically unlimited taking into consideration that
plants are not located too close to each other. In general, the source is always there and from
a technical point of view there are no limitations in using it.
For systems using the underground for seasonal (or sometimes short-term) storage of heat
and cold, the source of energy for storage may be different. Such a source is for example
waste heat from industrial process cooling. Another may be waste cold from heat pump
evaporators. These types of sources always have technical limitations such as load, duration,
temperatures, availability, etc. that are site specific. These limits should of course be
established in an early stage of a given project.

Figure 2. Technical limitations for an underground storage project may have technical
limitations related to load characteristics, working temperatures, availability of energy source,
etc. It is of importance to define these limitations at an early stage of the project

IV. 2. Geological limitations

In principle, one or several types of GSHP systems are technically feasible in any type of
geology. It is more a matter of finding a proper construction method, related to the special
geological conditions at the site for installation. Still, the geological requirements differ
according to what type of system is to be installed, summarized in the following general
statements.
 Closed loop systems are in general applicable in all types of geology. However,
thermal properties and drilling problems may be a limiting factor

GEOTRAINET GSHP 17 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 2 LIMITATIONS

 Open systems (based on pumping ground water) require a geology containing one
or several aquifers. Still, aquifer geometry, hydraulic properties and water chemistry
may be limiting factors on any site.

IV. 3. Hydrogeological limitations

The hydrogeological conditions would in practice govern the design of any open loop system.
Inputs, such as type of aquifer, geometry, groundwater level and gradient, textural
composition, hydraulic properties and boundaries are in fact essential for the design and
realization of such systems. For closed loop systems these parameters are of less
importance, but can in some cases constitute limiting conditions.
 Closed loop systems may be affected by flow of ground water. For systems with
heat extraction, this is normally an advantage. For systems with storage of heat and
cold (BTES), it may be a disadvantage for cold extraction. Furthermore, a low
groundwater level will limit the extraction of heat and cold if no backfilling is used
 Aquifers used for open systems may have a limited yield (well capacity) and/or an
unfavourable chemical composition. It may also be that the size and geometry is not
suitable. Furthermore, the aquifer may already be occupied by, for example, supply of
drinking water. This will be a limiting factor that cannot be overcome. During such
circumstances a closed loop system may or should be considered as an alternative.

IV. 4. Climate conditions

Climate plays an important role in the application of GSHP systems. There are many reasons
for this, but one essential condition is that the ambient temperature of the ground is reflected
by the average temperature in the air. The type of climate (tropical, arid, Mediterranean,
maritime and continental) will also limit the usage of some systems (Table 1).

Climate type Weather GSHP systems

conditions GSHP UTES
Tropical Hot, no seasons Not feasible Not feasible

Arid Hot, cool nights Not feasible Storage of cold night -

day

Mediterranean Warm Summer Occasionally Seasonal storage heat

Mild Winter feasible and cold

Marine Warm Summer Feasible Seasonal storage heat

Chilly Winter and cold

Continental Warm Summer Very feasible Seasonal storage heat

Cold Winter and cold

Table 1. Principal feasibility for GSHP systems in different climates

Another climate factor is the humidity. In hot climates with a high humidity, there will be
temperature requirement for cooling that allows condensation. In practice this means that it is

GEOTRAINET GSHP 18 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 2 LIMITATIONS

not possible to directly cool a building from the ground. However, in such a case there are
other technical solutions.
As indicated in Table 1, the best performance of UTES systems are linked to continental
climate conditions with a seasonal swing of temperatures from summer to winter. Such
conditions may also exist locally at unexpected locations, (see the example in Figure 3).

Ankara Luleå

40
30
20
Temperatur

10
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
-10
-20
-30
Hours
Timmar

Figure 3. The climate conditions for using UTES are almost equivalent in Luleå (north
Sweden) and Ankara (Turkey)

IV. 5. Environmental limitations

GSHP energy systems will in general contribute to less global emission of carbon dioxide and
other harmful environmental substances. However, country specific, and maybe also locally, there
may be limiting concerns such as:
 Contamination of the ground and the ground water by boreholes connecting to the
surface, boreholes shortcutting different aquifers and the usage of anti-freeze
 Change of the underground temperature that may affect the chemistry and bacterial
composition and growth in the underground
 Emissions, damages and local disturbances (noise, etc.) caused by drilling and
construction
 Damage to buildings, fauna and flora operating the systems.
In most countries, these types of limitations are the subject for legislation. The outcome from
permit applications may sometimes be that a GSHP scheme is denied by legal courts or local
authorities.
In general, open loop systems are more difficult to have approved than closed loop systems. The
reason is that using groundwater causes more concerns in most countries.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 19 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 2 LIMITATIONS

IV. 6. Economical limitations

In most cases, GSHP systems on the commercial market should be profitable. However, in
the R&D stage, unprofitable installations can be realized as well as systems that meet
environmental goals. In such cases, favourable funding will in many cases limit a less
favourable economic outcome from the system. Still, from a strict commercial point of view,
the cost limits can be explained as:
 The operational and maintenance costs combined must be less than for competitive
systems
 The additional investment cost for the GSHP system has to be paid back by the value
of saved energy and maintenance cost within the technical life time of the system
 The calculated straight pay back time varies between different sectors and different
countries, but commonly 10-15 years are judged as a reasonable upper limit.

IV. 7. Legislation as a limiting factor

Legislation incorporates a complex mixture of laws, codes, standards and norms. Specifically, such
regulations are more frequent in countries that already commonly use GSHP systems. In other
countries there may be very limited and a type of “wild west” situation on the regulation side. This
situation creates a limiting factor in itself, since the authorities do not know how to react on permit
applications. Indeed, this sometimes causes good schemes to never develop further.
At this stage it seems as if the legislators do not know how to evaluate GSHP systems from a
hazard point of view. Therefore, to create functional legislation in different countries, the legislator
has to be more aware, informed and possibly also trained on how GSHP systems work and what
they represent.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 20 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 3

CONCEPT AND FEASIBILITY STUDIES by Burkhard Sanner

I. INTRODUCTION
For a concept study, the following questions have firstly to be answered:
- Will a Ground Source Heat Pump (GHP) with groundwater wells or Borehole Heat
Exchanger (BHE) be allowed on a certain site?
- What is the underground geology in regard to thermal parameters, drilling, and
environmental issues?
- What are the thermal loads to be covered?
With this data the ground-side design can be assessed in a preliminary way. For the
underground data acquisition, at the concept study stage typically no investigations
penetrating into the underground (drilling, geophysics) are made, in order to keep costs low.
Finally, to check the economic feasibility, we must ask:
- What are the estimated investment and operation costs?

II. POSSIBILITY FOR INSTALLATION LICENSE

This topic should be addressed first, either by consulting maps (Fig. 1) or info systems
available e.g. on the internet, or by contacting the relevant authorities directly. No definite
answer will be given at this stage, as authorities will not take a decision before the planning is

Figure 1. (left) Example of a detailed map of a small part of the German state Hessen,
showing areas suitable for GHSP (green), areas requiring a case-by-case investigation and
decision (light brown), and restricted areas (red); (right) a similar map for the Kanton Bern in
Switzerland, from the online database: http://www.bve.be.ch/site/geo

GEOTRAINET GSHP 21 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 3 CONCEPT AND FEASIBILITY STUDIES

done and submitted; however, basic obstacles like groundwater protection zones, areas with
artesian aquifers, etc. can be identified quickly and a project on a site with no chance for a
license can be abandoned early, before incurring too much cost. Maps or GIS databases
meanwhile are available for many regions of Sweden, Germany and Switzerland; the first map
was done for the Kanton Bern in Switzerland around 1990, and today the data are available
as interactive GIS system (Fig. 1). In countries without sufficient published information, only
the direct contact to the relevant authorities can provide the necessary information.

III. UNDERGROUND PARAMETERS

The geological situation is that part of GSHP design which cannot be changed by the planner.
Hence the design needs to adapt to geology, and thus requires knowledge of geological data:
- Rock type and hardness (for GSHP drilling)
- Ground thermal characteristics (for GSHP operation)
- Groundwater situation (for GSHP drillling and operation)
For a concept study, the information can only be obtained from geological maps or
neighbouring boreholes. The required data concern mainly the lithology for BHE systems and
the hydrogeology for groundwater systems. From lithological information, both the preferred
drilling technology and the thermal parameters can be estimated. For translating rock type
into thermal parameters, a table from the German guideline VDI 4640 might help (Table 1).

Table 1. Part of the table for thermal parameters as given in VDI 4640, part 1, issue 2010

GEOTRAINET GSHP 22 Manual for Designers

 SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS
CHAPTER 3 CONCEPT AND FEASIBILITY STUDIES

In the underground, the ecological aspects are also of high importance, in respect to the
protection of ground and groundwater. So possible environmental problems with GSHP on the
site of the study should be investigated:
Effect on the ground and groundwater:
- leakage of antifreeze
- connecting different aquifer storeys or connecting aquifers to surface (quality of
grouting / long-term tightness)
- drilling into artesian water
- thermal effects
There can also be other adverse effects due to swelling clays, anhydrite, etc.
The relevant ecological issues are further discussed in Chapter 19.

IV. BUILDING LOAD DATA

The main design criteria that should be known on the building side:
- Peak energy loads (kW) at design conditions
- Annual energy loads (MWh)
- Temperature requirements of distribution systems (heating and cooling)
A reasonable representation of the annual load variation is required. For larger projects,
monthly energy loads and peak loads are minimum requirements.
The building data also comprise some information not directly linked to heat and cold
demand, but to the development of the site:
- Available area for drilling
- Further limitations below or above ground

V. SYSTEM PRE-DESIGN

With the data described above, the necessary size and layout of a GSHP system can be
3
determined. For a groundwater heat pump, 1 m /h of water produced from the well can
provide 3.5 – 4.5 kW, as a rule of thumb. For a system with BHE, a (more conservative)
estimate of the capacity of a BHE 100 m deep would be 3 - 4 kW. It is always better to make a
calculation of the required borehole length e.g. with EED, but the rule of thumb can help to
solve cases where not enough data are known for a reliable calculation.
Always keep in mind that such a preliminary estimation of system layout is done for a concept
study only, and the proper design for the installation needs to follow and to be based upon
actually measured data for ground parameters and thoroughly calculated with EED or similar
programmes.

VI. ECONOMIC FEASIBILITY

For a preliminary evaluation of the economic side, a calculation of the expected investment is
made:
- BHE with a unit price (e.g. 50 €/m)
- Heat Pump with a unit price (e.g. 800 €/kW)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 23 Manual for Designers

SECTION A. FUNDAMENTALS AND CONSTRAINTS

CHAPTER 3 CONCEPT AND FEASIBILITY STUDIES

Also the expected operation costs need to be summarized:

- Electricity consumption, electric power price (incl. special rates / off-peak)
- Maintenance and repairs
For easier comparison, calculation of the annual share of the investment and finance cost,
plus the annual operation cost, is advised. Then the result is compared to the cost for
investment and operation required for an alternative conventional plant.
If as a result of a concept/feasibility study there are now obstacles against drilling on a site,
and if both the technical and the financial aspects of the planned GSHP system are
favourable, the design can be taken a step forward to the stage of the actual filed
investigations, etc.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 24 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 4

GROUND HEAT TRANSFER by Burkhard Sanner

I. INTRODUCTION
Basically there are three possible kinds of heat transfer:
 Heat Conduction
 Heat Convection
 Heat Radiation.
Inside soil and rock, heat radiation can be neglected. Hence only two transport mechanisms
need to be considered. In many cases, the actual heat transfer in the underground is a
mixture of both conduction and convection, in varying degrees; in solid rocks without pore
space, heat transfer occurs by conduction only.

II. HEAT CONDUCTION

Heat always flows from a body with higher temperature to an area of lower temperature. The
amount of heat transported is controlled mainly by two factors: the temperature difference
between the areas considered, and the properties of the material in between the two areas.
The ability of a material to conduct heat can be described as “thermal conductivity”, given in
-1 -1
W/m/K (or W m K ) and is typically characterized by the letter λ. Sometimes the opposite is
used, the “thermal resistance” (in particular when dealing with insulation materials); this is
given in K/(W m) characterized by the letter R.
The parameters in heat conduction can be seen in analogy to other transport phenomena,
such as electric current or hydraulics, in the following table:

Heat Electricity Hydraulics

Temperature difference Voltage Hydraulic head
Thermal conductivity Electric conductivity Hydraulic conductivity
Thermal resistance Electric resistance
Heat flow Electric current Fluid flow

The parameter thermal conductivity is controlled by the following components in soil and rock:
 Thermal conductivity of the solid mass (minerals or combination of minerals)
 Thermal conductivity of pore fillings
 Heat transfer at boundaries between solid mass particles, or between solid mass and
pore filling.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 25 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 4 GROUND HEAT TRANSFER

In hard rock, only the solid mass controls the thermal behaviour of the underground. In soil,
unconsolidated sediments, or rock with voids (e.g. fractures, or karst), the filling of these voids
can have a substantial influence. This is also reflected in the fact that the variation of thermal
conductivity in porous material is much higher than with hard rock, as the table below shows.
For pores filled with air (e.g. dry gravel or dry sand), the thermal conductivity of the whole
material is rather poor, while water as pore filling is much better. This is the reason why in
porous materials the moisture content controls the thermal conductivity to a large extent. In
hard rock, the content of quartz is a good marker for thermal conductivity, as quartz is among
the frequent minerals with the highest thermal conductivity (7-14 W/m/K, dependent upon the
orientation of the crystals to the direction of measurement).

Thermal conductivity (W/m/K)

Type of rock
recommended
Clay/silt, dry 0,4 - 1,0 0,5
Clay/silt, water saturated 0,9 – 2,3 1,7
Sand, dry 0,3 – 0,8 0,4
Unconsolidated Sand, water saturated 1,5 – 4,0 2,4
rock Gravel, dry 0,4 – 0,5 0,4
Gravel, water saturated 1,6 – 2,0 1,8
Peat, soft lignite 0,2 – 0,7 0,4
Claystone, siltstone 1,1 – 3,5 2,2
Sandstone 1,3 - 5,1 2,3
Conglomerates 1,3 - 5,1 2,3
Marl 1,5 – 3,5 2,1
Solid Limestone 2,5 – 4,0 2,8
Sediments Dolomite 2,8 – 4,3 3,2
Anhydrite 1,5 – 7,7 4,1
Gypsum 1,3 – 2,8 1,6
Salt 5,3 – 6,4 5,4
Hard coal 0,3 – 0,6 0,4
Tuff 1,1 1,1
e.g. rhyolite,
3,1 – 3,4 3,3
Vulcanite, acid to trachyte
intermediate e.g. latite,
2,0 – 2,9 2,6
dacite
Magmatites Vulcanite, alkaline to e.g. andesite,
1,3 – 2,3 1,7
ultra-alkaline basalt
Plutonite, acid to Granite 2,1 – 4,1 3,4
intermediate Syenite 1,7 – 3,5 2,6
Plutonite, alkaline to Diorite 2,0 – 2,9 2,6
ultra-alkaline Gabbro 1,7 – 2,5 1,9
Clay shale 1,5 – 2,6 2,1
Slightly metamorphic
Chert 4,5 – 5,0 4,5
Marble 1,3 – 3,1 2,5
Quartzite 5,0 – 6,0 5,5
Metamorphic Moderately to highly
Mica schist 1,5 – 3,1 2,2
rock metamorphic
Gneiss 1,5 – 3,1 2,2
Vulcanite, acid to
intermediate Amphibolite 1,9 – 4,0 2,9
e.g. rhyolite,
2,1 - 3,6 2,9
trachyte

GEOTRAINET GSHP 26 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 4 GROUND HEAT TRANSFER

Values for thermal conductivity can be found in several publications; a good list is given in the
German guideline VDI 4640 part 1. For projects above ca. 30 kW, it is always recommended
to investigate this parameter directly on site, using the Thermal Response Test (TRT, cf.
chapter 8). The values in the table above are taken from VDI 4640 (issue 2010):

III. HEAT CONVECTION

Transport by convection means that heat is carried with a material of a certain temperature
into areas of lower temperature. In hydrogeology, the term “convection” typically is used for
the natural, vertical movement of fluids driven by density differences due to different
temperatures; for the mainly horizontal fluid transport due to pressure differences in the
aquifer, the term “advection” is used.
3
Water has a rather high specific heat capacity of about 4.2 kJ/kg/K (or 4.2 MJ/m /K), and thus
is very well suited for convective heat transport. However, there is always an interaction of the
fluid with the rock mass it migrates through, and thus a heat exchange between fluid and solid
mass. As a consequence, the convective heat transport is much slower than the groundwater
flow itself.
For heat transport by convection, a single parameter, like thermal conductivity in the case of
conduction, cannot be given. The process is much more complex and comprises fluid
properties, properties of solid mass (matrix), pore size and characteristics, hydraulic
properties, etc. While conductive heat transport can be reduced mathematically in a way that
it can be calculated analytically, this is hardly possible for convective heat transport. And if
convective heat transport occurs, there is always a conductive component involved. Hence
the calculation of convective heat transfer requires numerical simulation by coupling thermal
and hydraulic models.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 27 Manual for Designers

GEOTRAINET GSHP 28 Manual for Designers
 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 5

DESIGN CRITERIA by Walter J. Eugster

I. INTRODUCTION

The most important design criteria (in addition to the start-up procedures) for ground source
heat pump systems are the following:
 High performance
 High reliability
 High system safety
 Cost effectiveness.
Beside these items, there is a main maxim to follow in the design procedure: simplicity. The
systems should be as simple as possible. This maxim helps to minimize many of the possible
system faults during operation.
A high performance of the GSHP installation must be achieved. The aim of high system
efficiency is, on the one hand, to minimize the operational costs and, on the other hand, to
compensate for the losses in the electricity generation process. The electricity generation
efficiency may differ from country to country and may even be sometimes a local matter. To
satisfy climate targets, the newly installed GSHP systems have to over-compensate the
generation losses, both current and future.

II. FUNDAMENTALS

Planners and designers must be aware that there is an enormous difference between the
lifetimes of the underground elements of the system and the installations in the plant room of
the building.
The heat pump, the circulation pumps and most of the other important system parts are
changed two to three times during the lifetime of the underground installations. Therefore, the
borehole heat exchangers have to work with up to three new generations of heat pumps. This
is the reason why another important design maxim should be followed: a borehole heat
exchanger is never too long.
On the technical side, a high system performance is achieved by keeping the temperature
difference between the heat source and the heat load as small as possible and by minimizing
all possible losses, including energy, pressure and temperature.
GSHP systems do not need any periodical maintenance work; such systems are intended to
be maintenance free. To achieve high system reliability over the lifetime of the whole
system is no longer a sole question of proper design. Much more important are:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 29 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 5 DESIGN CRITERIA

 the installation work

 the commissioning
 overall quality control
 installation should use only certified, tested and approved material and system parts.

To guarantee high system safety, both installation and the future operation have to follow
exactly any manufacturers‟ and authorities‟ instructions and specifications. It is highly
recommended that safety and hazard notices are placed and displayed near to the main
system components.

III. COST EFFECTIVENESS

This is always important, although it can be a risky and a double-edged entity. Cost
effectiveness with GSHP systems means avoiding any unnecessary costs. It does not mean
lowering the overall costs by lowering the required quality of the installation or of parts of it.
There are a few rules for keeping costs low and at the same retaining high overall quality:

 Install a GSHP system only in energy refurbished buildings

 Include not only the installation costs but also all maintenance and operational costs
in an overall cost compilation
 Include CO2 savings in the system benefits
 Set the inevitable GSHP implied extra costs off against “weak accounts” like
environmental consciousness or green image building or against “hard accounts” like
gaining in-house room for other activities or the value of specially designed wall/floor
tiles, over-designed kitchens, etc.
It can be noted that, in Switzerland, 80% of the new-built small houses are equipped with a
heat pump – because of the market. In greater urban areas, nobody wants to buy a house
without a heat pump so that the lack of a heat pump lowers the price of a building
significantly.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 30 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6

BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS by Göran Hellström

I. INTRODUCTION
For single-family houses and other small-scale applications the purpose of the ground-source
heat pump is basically to use the natural ground temperature as a heat source during the
heating mode and as a recipient of heat during the cooling mode. The ensuing change of
ground temperature around the boreholes should be kept small in order to avoid reduced
performance of the system. A maximum thermal interaction with the surrounding ground is
desired, since the intention is to dissipate the thermal energy in the ground. The ground is
also used for storage of thermal energy (Underground Thermal Energy Storage) in which
case the thermal interaction with the ground surrounding the storage volume ground is
undesirable.

An important issue in the design of systems using borehole heat exchangers is to identify
cost-effective methods to construct the borehole heat exchanger so that heat can be injected
or extracted from the ground without excessive temperature differences between the heat
carrier fluid and the surrounding ground. The efficiency of a ground-source coupled device,
such as a ground-source heat pump (both in heating and cooling mode), free-cooling heat
exchanger or solar collector recharge is higher for smaller temperature differences. This
chapter presents an overview of different designs of borehole heat exchangers (BHEs).

II. CONCEPTS
We begin with a brief description of the basic thermal processes involved when heat is
transferred between the circulating heat carrier fluid in flow channels in the boreholes and the
surrounding ground.

II. 1. Fluid-to-ground thermal resistance

The heat transfer between the heat carrier fluid and the surrounding ground depends on the
arrangement of the flow channels, the convective heat transfer in the ducts, and the thermal
properties of the materials involved in the thermal process. The thermal resistances
associated with these different elements combine to form a fluid-to-ground thermal resistance.
The two major parts of this resistance are the thermal resistance between the heat carrier
fluid and the borehole wall, which is commonly called the borehole thermal resistance, and
the thermal resistance of the surrounding ground from the borehole wall to some suitable
average temperature level. The influence of the borehole thermal resistance may become
relatively large in conventional designs. This is especially crucial in applications with high
demands on heat injection rates and high temperatures such as solar heating systems and

GEOTRAINET GSHP 31 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

low temperature applications with high demands on achieving high heat transfer rates at small
temperature differences.

II. 2. Ground thermal resistance

The ground thermal resistance involves the surrounding ground from the borehole wall to
some suitable average temperature level. This temperature level is often chosen to be the
natural undisturbed ground temperature T0 in systems of the dissipative type, whereas the
local average ground temperature Tm is more appropriate in storage applications.

II. 2. 1. Dissipative type applications

For dissipative type applications, the thermal process in the ground has a genuine transient
behaviour that has to be accounted for. It is convenient to consider the thermal response due
to a step-change in specific heat injection rate q (W/m) given per unit length of the borehole
and to associate the temperature evolution with a time-dependent ground thermal resistance
Rg, so that T b - T 0 = q Rg
Where Tb is the temperature in the borehole wall.
Thereby the unit of the ground thermal resistance Rg becomes K/(W/m) (Fig. 1).

II. 2. 2. Storage type applications

In storage type applications a certain ground region can be assigned to each ground heat
exchanger. The temperature in this ground region is called the local average temperature Tm.
The thermal resistance Rg between Tb and the local average temperature Tm is defined by:
Tb - Tm = q Rg.
For relatively closed spaced boreholes, the thermal interaction between adjacent boreholes is
fully developed for heat injection and extraction pulses with duration of about a week or more.
Short-term variations, where the thermal interaction between adjacent boreholes typically can
be neglected, are superimposed on this process. The relative importance of the borehole
thermal resistance is larger for storage type applications (Fig. 2).
5

Fluid
4

Rb
Temperature change

3 Figure 1. Dissipative system:

Borehole wall o
Temperature change ( C) due
to borehole thermal resistance
2 and ground thermal resistance
Rg for a constant heat injection
rate. The undisturbed ground
1 temperature is used as a
reference temperature
Undisturbed ground
0

0 5 10 15 20 Time 25 30 35 40

GEOTRAINET GSHP 32 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

5
Fluid
4
Rb
Borehole wall
Temperature change

3
Rg Figure 2. Storage type system:
2 Temperature change due to
borehole thermal resistance and
Mean store
ground thermal resistance for a
temperature constant heat injection rate. The
1
mean storage temperature is
used as the reference
Undisturbed ground temperature
0
0 10 20 Time 30 40

II. 3. Borehole thermal resistance

An important factor for the design of borehole systems is the thermal resistance between the
heat carrier fluid in the borehole flow channels and the borehole wall. The fluid-to-borehole
wall thermal resistance gives the temperature difference between the fluid temperature in the
collector (Tf) and the temperature at the borehole wall (Tb) for a certain specific heat transfer
rate q (W/m):
Tf  Tb  Rb  q
This so-called borehole thermal resistance depends on the arrangement of the flow channels
and the thermal properties of the materials involved. The values observed in field tests range
from 0.01 K/(W/m) for the open coaxial arrangement (heat carrier fluid in direct contact with
the rock) to about 0.25 K/(W/m) for single U-pipes in bentonite grout where no special
precautions have been made to keep the pipes close to the borehole wall. The temperature
difference between the heat carrier fluid and the borehole wall is proportional to the heat
transfer rate. For a typical heat transfer rate of 50 W/m, the corresponding temperature
difference becomes 0.5 ºC to 12.5 ºC. The borehole thermal resistance may have significant
effect on the system performance and should be kept as small as possible. Filling materials
(e.g. bentonite, concrete, etc.) in grouted boreholes usually provide better heat transfer than
pure stagnant water. However, in water-filled boreholes, the heat transfer induces natural
convection in the borehole water and in the surrounding permeable ground. This
phenomenon, which is more pronounced at high temperatures and large heat transfer rates,
leads to a reduction of the overall borehole thermal resistance. The overall thermal
performance of the borehole field subject to a certain heat load variation depends not only on
the borehole thermal resistance, but also on the transient thermal resistance of the
surrounding ground and the thermal influence from other boreholes.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 33 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

II. 4. Heat transfer between flow channels

The fluid temperatures along the flow channels will vary in accordance with the heat balance
between the axial convective heat transport and the transverse heat transfer to the
surrounding ground. The temperature difference that arises between the upward and the
downward channels may become large at low flow rates. The ensuing heat exchange
between the channels of opposing flow may lead to a reduced efficiency of the ground heat
exchanger. For conventional U-pipe borehole heat exchangers, these effects are usually
important when the flow is laminar, especially in combination with deep boreholes. This effect
has also been observed in coaxial borehole heat exchangers with poor insulation between
inner and outer flow channels.

II. 5. Heat capacity effects in the borehole

When a step change occurs in the heat transfer to a BHE, it causes a rapid increase of the
temperature of the heat carrier fluid. A large fraction of the supplied heat is initially absorbed
by the fluid and subsequently by other capacitive materials in the borehole such as the filling
material outside the flow channels. After an initial phase, the capacitive effect of the borehole
is practically negligible, and almost all of the supplied heat is transferred to the ground. Short-
term pulses often require that the influence of the borehole heat capacity is accounted for.

17

16

15
Fluid temperature

14

13

12

11 Cylinder solution with fluid and filling capacity

10 Line source solution (without borehole capacity)

9 Cylinder solution without borehole capacity

8
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Time (hours)

Figure 3. Fluid temperature increase as a function of time (hours) for a case based on data
from a thermal response test. The initial ground temperature is 8 ºC

GEOTRAINET GSHP 34 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

Otherwise, the calculated fluid temperatures will be too high (during injection of heat) or too
low (during extraction of heat). This is especially important if there is a large thermal
resistance between the borehole heat capacity and the borehole wall. For heat injection
pulses of longer duration, the influence of the borehole heat capacity can usually be
neglected.
Figure 3 shows a numerical example based on typical data from a thermal response test
where a constant heat injection rate is supplied to the borehole. Such tests are commonly
evaluated using a line source or cylinder source model. The example indicates that the heat
capacities of the fluid and filling material have an important influence at least during the first
10 -15 hours, which is the reason why measured data from the first 15 hours are excluded
during evaluation of the test results.

III. DIFFERENT DESIGNS OF BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

Vertical ground heat exchanger piping configurations can be classified based on how the heat
exchange from the flow channels takes place and to their cross-sectional geometry.

Figure 4 shows the two fundamental designs.

Figure 4. The two

fundamental borehole heat
exchanger designs

In the U-pipe type BHE, both the downward and the upward flow channels participate in the
heat exchange with the surrounding ground. The characteristics of the coaxial (or tube-in-
tube) type BHE is that heat exchange occurs from either the upstream or downstream flow
channel (the flow direction may also be different during injection or extraction of heat). The
inner return pipe is (ideally) insulated in order to avoid thermal short-circuiting between the
upwards and downwards flow channels. In this section examples will be given of borehole
heat exchangers intended to operate according to these two fundamental concepts. Most
designs use closed circuits, which means that the heat carrier fluid is never in direct contact
with the surrounding ground. A few designs permit such direct contact, thereby possibly
minimizing the thermal resistance between the heat carrier fluid and the ground.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 35 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

III. 1. Coaxial type BHE

Characteristics of the coaxial type BHE is that heat exchange between fluid and ground
occurs from either the upwards or downwards flow channel.

III. 1. 1. Coaxial BHE without liner

The simplest arrangement of the flow channels in a borehole heat exchanger is to insert a
single plastic tube to the bottom of the borehole. The annular region between the plastic tube
and the borehole wall provides the channel for the returning flow. This type of open borehole
heat exchanger is very favourable from a heat transfer point of view because the heat transfer
fluid can be in direct contact with the borehole wall. In the US, this arrangement is also called
a standing column well. The surrounding rock may be permeable, in which case secondary
circulation of the fluid in the formation contributes to the heat dissipation.

Figure 5. Coaxial BHE without liner (Luleå, Sweden)

III. 1. 2. Coaxial BHE with tube-in-tube

A closed system is often required due to unstable borehole walls or because of geochemical
concerns. A closed annular duct can be realized by lining the borehole with an impermeable
material. Inserting and cementing PVC-tubes (or steel tubes) in boreholes is rather difficult
and expensive compared to U-pipes, so this method has only been used a few times in
relatively shallow boreholes in crystalline rock. Due to the considerable thermal resistance of
the filling material between the outer pipe and the borehole wall, the measured borehole
thermal resistance for these arrangements have been similar to those of the simpler single U-
pipes. However, in deep clay formations the vertically pushed coaxial tube has been used to
more advantage, since the clay around the outer pipe will in most cases eventually conform to
the pipe surface (there is no “filling” material).

GEOTRAINET GSHP 36 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

III. 1. 3. Coaxial BHE with soft liner

There is also a possibility of using a flexible soft liner, which after insertion will be pushed
against the borehole wall when the interior is filled with fluid. The advantage of this design is
that there is no filling material between the liner and the borehole wall. However, several field
tests have revealed problems with leakage.

III. 1. 4. Multichamber BHE

The outer heat exchanging flow channel can be divided into many smaller chambers (Fig. 6).
Due to the thermal resistance of the filling material between the exterior of the pipe and the
borehole wall and possible thermal short-circuiting between the inner and outer flow channels,
the efficiency of this design is similar to U-pipes.

Figure 6. Multichamber BHE (Burgdorf, Switzerland)

Figure 7. Multipipe BHE. Example with 12 peripheral supply polyethylene pipes (diameter 20
mm) and one central return pipe (diameter 70 mm) in an unlined borehole (diameter 120 mm)
(Mathey, Switzerland)
III. 1. 5. Multipipe BHE
The outer heat exchanging flow channel can also be assembled with many smaller pipes (Fig.
7). Field tests have shown that this arrangement of the flow channel can achieve high

GEOTRAINET GSHP 37 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

performance. The flow channels are standard polyethylene pipes of different sizes. There are
currently no commercial products of this type available on the market. The challenges are the
insulation of the inner pipe, the design of the bottom piece, the installation procedure and the
overall costs.

III. 2. U-pipe type BHE

The usual method to achieve the heat exchange in a borehole is to insert one or more U-
shaped loops of polyethylene tubing into the borehole. Single U-pipes are used in Northern
Europe and North America, whereas double U-pipes are common in Central Europe. In
Northern Europe, the boreholes are usually filled with groundwater to a few meters below the
ground surface. In the US and in Central Europe it is common practice, and often required, to
backfill the boreholes with some sealing material such as bentonite, concrete or quartz sand.
Special mixtures, so-called thermally enhanced grouts, have been developed to provide for
better heat transfer than pure bentonite.

III. 2. 1. Single U-pipe

The single U-pipe has been the industry standard for about 30 years. The main advantages
are the simplicity of the design, ease of transportation and straightforward installation
compared with other alternatives. An installation based on proven best-practice procedures

Figure 8. Single U-pipe with bottom piece including weight

has an almost unlimited lifetime. The main problems have involved leakage due to improper
fusing of U-bends and weak bottom pieces. The major disadvantage of the single U-pipe is
the relatively poor heat transfer capacity, especially at non-turbulent flow conditions.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 38 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

III. 2. 2. Single U-pipe with spacers

The thermal performance of the single U-pipe is increased if the pipes are positioned close to
the borehole wall. This can be accomplished by the use of so-called spacers. Examples of
such devices are shown in Figures 9 and 10.

Figure 9. Single U-pipe with spacer (GeoClip, GBT Inc.): the spacer‟s spring-action is
released as the tremie pipe (middle pipe in left figure) is pulled up

III. 2. 3. Multitube U-pipes

Figure 10. Double U-

pipe with spacers
(Neckarsulm, Germany)

Double, triple and multitube U-pipes are simple extensions of the single U-tube concept. The
main advantages of multitube arrangements compared with single U-tubes are that the
effective heat transfer area increases and that the influence of the relatively large thermal
resistance of the plastic tubes decreases.
The influence of the convective heat transfer coefficient also decreases, which means that the
importance of non-laminar flow at design loads is somewhat less critical. This may then allow
for slightly lower pressure drops across the borehole heat exchangers in order to achieve a
certain heat transfer rate.

III. 2. 4. Three pipe arrangements

A variation of the U-pipe borehole heat exchanger is an arrangement with two pipes in one

GEOTRAINET GSHP 39 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

direction and one pipe in the other direction. It was used in the early 1980s when ground-
source heat pumps were being introduced in Sweden, but soon disappeared from the market
due to the complexity of the design.

IV. THERMAL PERFORMANCE OF U-PIPE TYPE BHE

In this section we will take a closer look at the thermal performance of the most common type
of borehole heat exchanger – the U-pipe. The most important parameters influencing the
borehole thermal resistance are fluid flow rate, pipe material, number of pipes, pipe position,
and thermal conductivity of filling material.

IV. 1. Pipe material

The U-pipes for normal applications use polyethylene pipes. These are flexible and durable.
However, the thermal resistance of the pipes is relatively high, especially with the thicker walls
of the SDR-11 and PN12 pipes (Table 1). The pressure rating refers to a temperature of 20
o
C. The strength improves with lower temperatures, but reduces with higher temperatures.
Other materials have to be considered when the pipes are exposed to higher temperatures
o
than 30-40 C. The polybutylene pipes have been used in high-temperature applications.

Type Material Outer Wall Thermal Thermal

diameter thickness cond. resistance
(mm) (mm) (W/(m,K)) (K/(W/m))
PE DN25 PN8 Polyethylene 25,0 2,0 0,42 0,066
PE DN32 PN8 Polyethylene 32,0 2,0 0,42 0,051
PE DN40 PN8 Polyethylene 40,0 2,3 0,42 0,046
PE DN50 PN8 Polyethylene 50,0 2,9 0,42 0,047
PE DN20 PN12 Polyethylene 20,0 2,0 0,42 0,085
PE DN25 PN12 Polyethylene 25,0 2,3 0,42 0,077
PE DN32 PN12 Polyethylene 32,0 3,0 0,42 0,079
PE DN40 PN12 Polyethylene 40,0 3,7 0,42 0,078
PE DN50 PN12 Polyethylene 50,0 4,6 0,42 0,077
SDR-11 3/4" Polyethylene 26,7 2,5 0,42 0,079
SDR-11 1" Polyethylene 33,4 3,0 0,42 0,075
SDR-11 1-1/4" Polyethylene 42,2 3,9 0,42 0,077
SDR-11 1-1/2" Polyethylene 48,3 4,4 0,42 0,076
SDR-11 2" Polyethylene 60,3 5,5 0,42 0,076
SDR-13.5 1" Polybutylene 28,6 2,2 0,22 0,121
SDR-13.5 1-1/4" Polybutylene 34,9 2,6 0,22 0,117
SDR-13.5 1-1/2" Polybutylene 41,3 3,1 0,22 0,118
SDR-13.5 2" Polybutylene 54,0 4,0 0,22 0,116

Table 1. Properties of plastic pipes used for ground loops

IV. 2. Filling material

A vertical borehole may require that some kind of backfilling material is used to fill the space
between the flow channels and the borehole wall. One reason may be to provide a good
thermal contact with the surrounding ground due to low thermal conductivity of natural filling

GEOTRAINET GSHP 40 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

material or low ground water level. Another important issue is to seal the borehole to limit
vertical water movement along the borehole that may cause environmental problems, such as
migration of polluted water, drainage of soil layers near the ground surface and disturbance of
the hydraulic characteristics of artesian formations.
Special grouts are used to provide a low permeability suitable for sealing the borehole. It is
important that these grouts have the capability to bond against both the borehole wall and the
pipes. The mixtures must be workable and pumpable during installation with little shrinkage
during curing. If shrinkage occurs, there may be the potential for a fluid migration pathway.
Common grouts, such as bentonite, usually have low thermal conductivity. Special thermal
grouts have been developed to enhance the thermal conductivity. Use of a commercial ready-
mixed product is strongly recommended. The thermal conductivity of some common filling
materials are given in Table 2.

Material Thermal conductivity (W/m,K)

Sand, gravel – dry 0,4
Water (stagnant) 0,6
Bentonite 10 %, water 0,7
Bentonite/cement/sand, 9/9/20 %, water 0,7-0,8
Sand, moist 1,0
Bentonite 10 %, frozen 1,4
Bentonite/quartzsand, 12/50 %, water 1,5
Gravel, water-saturated 1,8
Ice 2,3
Cement/sand, 27 %/58 %, water 2,4
Quartzsand, water-saturated 2,4-2,7
ThermoCem (cement/graphite) 2,0

Table 2. Thermal conductivity (W/m,K) of borehole filling materials

Grout should preferably be placed in the borehole by pressure pumping through a tremie pipe
(after water or other drilling fluid has been circulated in the annular space sufficient to clear
obstructions) in order to avoid bridging and voids. In the US, the recommended procedure is
to lower the tremie pipe to the bottom of the zone being grouted, and then raise it slowly as
the material is introduced. In Europe, the recommendation is to perform the grouting without
raising the tremie pipe and then to leave it in place.
A grout with high thermal conductivity significantly reduces the borehole resistance. As the
total temperature difference between the heat carrier fluid and the undisturbed ground
depends on the combined borehole and ground thermal resistance, it has been found that the
greatest reduction in required borehole length of the ground loop occurred with the higher
ground thermal conductivity values. Where grout and ground thermal conductivities are
similar, the borehole diameter is not a critical factor for the performance of the borehole heat
exchanger. If the ground thermal conductivity is higher than the grout thermal conductivity, a
greater borehole diameter will yield a higher combined borehole and ground thermal
resistance. Smaller boreholes require less grout and have a lower total resistance, which

GEOTRAINET GSHP 41 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

indicates that the borehole diameter has an economic impact. Determining the optimum grout
for a given project will require actual costs for grout, pipes and drilling

IV. 2. 1. Cementitious grouts

 Advantages: Suitable permeability, easily pumped and mixed, suitable for most
formations, properties can be altered with readily available additives
 Disadvantages: Shrinkage, long curing time, high density results in loss to formation,
heat of hydration, affects water quality.

IV. 2. 2. Bentonite grouts

 Advantages: Suitable permeability with high solids grouts, non-shrinking and self-
healing in water-satured environment, no heat of hydration, low density, no curing
time
 Disadvantages: Premature swelling, high viscosity, high density results in loss to
formation, high viscosity, difficult mixing, large shrinkage in dry environment.

One serious drawback of the bentonite grout is the strong sensitivity to frost action. When the
water first freezes and then thaws the bentonite loses it adsorption property and the water
separates from the mixture. The previously firm bentonite becomes almost liquid during the
thawing. Freezing a low-permeability bentonite mixture with high water content may lead to
compression pressure on the pipes due to the volume expansion during the water-ice phase
change. The compression may damage the pipes and cause leakage.

IV. 3. Pipe location

The borehole thermal resistance depends on the position of the U-pipe shanks in the
borehole. The thermal resistance increases with distance between the pipes and the borehole
wall. The thermal resistance in the filling material is inversely proportional to its thermal
conductivity. Figure 11 shows the estimated borehole thermal resistance of a typical single U-
pipe installation for three different positions of the shanks and filling thermal conductivity.
Three different pipe configurations are indicated: the pipes touching at the bore centre
(Configuration A), the same distance between the pipes as between the pipes and the
borehole wall (Configuration B), and each pipe touching the borehole wall at diametrically
opposite points (Configuration C).
The A configuration gives the highest borehole thermal resistance and it is considered to be a
very conservative design assumption. Configuration C is the optimum placement of the pipes,
but it will not occur consistently along the borehole unless spacers are used to control the
pipe spacing. Configuration B is assumed to be a reasonable design assumption in most
situations without spacers.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 42 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

0,20

0,18
Thermal resistance (K/(W/m))

0,16

0,14

0,12

0,10

0,08

0,06

0,04

0,02

0,00
0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5
Thermal conductivity of filling material (W/m,K)

Figure 11. The borehole thermal resistance (K/(W/m) for a single U-pipe as a function of filling
material thermal conductivity (W/m,K) for three different positions of the U-pipe shanks; non-
laminar flow conditions (Re≈3000)

Figure 11 also illustrates the advantage of using thermal grouts (thermal conductivity 1.5 - 2.0
W/m,K) instead of standard bentonite grouts (thermal conductivity 0.7 - 0.8 W/m,K).

IV. 4. Fluid flow rate

The convective heat transfer from the bulk fluid in the pipe to the inside wall of the pipe may
have a significant impact on the borehole thermal resistance. Although the equivalent thermal
resistance of the convective heat transfer process is small at turbulent flow conditions, it
constitutes about half of the total borehole resistance at laminar flow conditions. The influence
of the internal heat transfer between the upwards and downwards flow channel, the thermal
short-circuiting, can also be included in the effective borehole thermal resistance. The thermal
short-circuiting increases with increasing borehole depth and decreasing flow rate. An
example of the composition of the effective borehole thermal resistance as a function of the
flow rate is shown in Figure 12.
The combined thermal resistance of the pipe material and the convective heat transfer inside
the pipe has to be kept low. The contribution to the total borehole thermal resistance is large
for single U-pipes of polyethylene, but usually decreases with number pipes in the borehole.
The borehole thermal resistance increases with decreasing flow rate due to development of
laminar flow and increasing thermal short-circuiting between upward and downwards flow
channels. For a given heat extraction rate, this lowers the source temperature and the
Coefficient of Performance (COP) of the heat pump, which increases the amount of primary
energy required to deliver a certain heating rate to the house. Higher flow rates improve the
heat transfer capacity but this advantage is at some point offset by higher energy
consumption by the circulation pump, which is roughly proportional to the third power of the

GEOTRAINET GSHP 43 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

flow rate. The pressure drop across a single U-pipe for the above example (Fig.12) is given in
Figure 13.

0,20
Thermal short-circuiting
Borehole thermal resistance (K/(W/m))

0,18
Fluid flow
0,16 Pipe
Grout
0,14

0,12

0,10

0,08

0,06

0,04

0,02

0,00
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
Flow rate (litre/sec)

Figure 12. Components of the borehole thermal resistance (K/(W/m)) for a single U-pipe as a
function of fluid flow rate (litre/sec). The example is based on a 100 m deep 14 cm borehole
fitted with a single U-pipe using 40 mm polyethylene pipes (SDR11) and thermal grout
o
(thermal conductivity 2.0 W/m,K). Fluid properties are 28% ethanol-water solution at 0 C

180
170
160
150
140
130
120
Pressure drop (kPa)

110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
Flow rate (litre/sec)

Figure 13. Pressure drop (kPa) across the borehole heat exchanger as a function of fluid flow
rate (litre/sec). The example is based on a 100 m deep borehole with a single U-pipe using 40
o
mm polyethylene pipes (SDR11). Fluid properties are 28% ethanol-water solution at 0 C

GEOTRAINET GSHP 44 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

The recommendations of the ASHRAE design guide (Kavanaugh & Rafferty, 1997) is to strive
for a Reynold‟s number of 2500-3000 at design energy loads (Fig. 14). This is a rule-of-thumb
expressing a reasonable compromise between heat pump efficiency and energy requirement
of the circulation pump.

8000
25 mm
7000 32 mm
40 mm
6000
Reynold's number

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0
0,0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8
Flow rate (litre/sec)

Figure 14. Reynold‟s number as a function of fluid flow rate (litre/sec) a 25 mm, 32 mm, or 40
o
mm polyethylene pipe (SDR11); fluid properties are 28% ethanol-water solution at 0 C (the
zone with a Reynold‟s number of 2500-3000 is indicated in blue)
.
V. GENERAL COMMENTS
The thermal performance of different designs of borehole heat exchangers can be quantified
according to the borehole thermal resistance evaluated from tests in the field or laboratory.
Although most of these values are in reasonable agreement with theoretical estimates, they
should be used with caution.

V. 1. 1. Thermal response tests

Many values originate from thermal response tests where ideally heat is injected at a constant
rate and the resulting fluid temperature evolution is measured. The evaluation of these tests
typically uses an effective ground thermal conductivity and the borehole thermal resistance as
free parameters to obtain the best fit between measured and simulated values. The simulation
models assume that the heat transport outside the flow channels takes place by heat
conduction only. However, there may be deviations from this assumption. In a permeable
water-saturated material there is convective heat transport by moving groundwater.
Evaporation and condensation occur in unsaturated conditions. Freezing may take place if the
thermal response test uses heat extraction. These other modes of heat transport may disturb
the evaluation with a conductive model, so that the fitted parameters do not reflect the ”true”
borehole thermal resistance.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 45 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

V. 1. 2. Internal heat transfer

The temperature difference between the downwards and upwards flow channel causes an
internal heat transfer, a so-called thermal short-circuiting, that reduces the efficiency of the
borehole heat exchanger. This effect may be included in an effective borehole thermal
resistance for the whole borehole. It can be demonstrated theoretically that this value is
composed of local borehole thermal resistance between the flow channels and the borehole
wall and an additional short-circuiting part, which depends on the thermal resistance between
the upwards and downwards flow channels, the borehole length and the flow rate. The
thermal response test measures this effective borehole thermal resistance. The same
borehole heat exchanger design may then give a slightly different effective borehole thermal
resistance because of differences in borehole length and flow rate. The flow rate (and type of
heat carrier fluid) will of course also influence the heat transfer coefficients between the fluid
and the walls of the flow channels.

V. 1. 3. Groundwater movement
In grouted boreholes, groundwater movement can only occur outside the borehole. There
may be a regional groundwater flow, but also a large-scale natural convection induced by
temperature gradients around the borehole. The magnitude of the natural convection depends
on the heat transfer rate and the temperature level. The driving force is the difference in
density of the groundwater and the flow resistance depends on the permeability of the ground
and the viscosity of the groundwater. The driving force tends to be higher and the flow
resistance markedly lower at higher temperatures. The evaluated effective thermal
conductivity and borehole resistance from a thermal response test may then depend on
whether heat was injected or extracted during the test.
The situation becomes more complicated when water-filled boreholes are used. If the
borehole is drilled in impermeable ground, there is still the possibility of local natural
convection between the exterior surface of the flow channels and the borehole wall. This
natural convection enhances the heat transfer through the groundwater in the borehole. The
enhancement depends on temperature, specific heat transfer rate and geometry of
groundwater filled area of the borehole (Littlefield & Desai, 1986).
In permeable ground, such as porous media and fractured rocks, the water-filled borehole
serves as a conduit for vertical water movement. The pressure differences causing the
vertical movement can be due to artesian conditions or induced by temperature changes in
the borehole water.

V. 1. 4. Short-term variations
The borehole thermal resistance as commonly used is defined based on a quasi-steady-state
temperature difference between the heat carrier fluid and the borehole wall during a constant
specific heat transfer rate. This steady-state condition takes some time to be established. The

GEOTRAINET GSHP 46 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

duration of the initial transient period depends on the heat capacity of the material in the
borehole. A large heat capacity is favourable since it reduces the temperature increase for
short-term variations. This aspect of different borehole heat exchanger designs is not included
in the ”steady-state” borehole thermal resistance.

V. 1. 5. Borehole diameter
It should be noted that the borehole thermal resistance values reported here relate to
boreholes that may have different diameters. The thermal response of a borehole heat
exchanger depends on both the borehole thermal resistance and a transient thermal
resistance of the surrounding ground. A larger borehole diameter results in a lower ground
thermal resistance. However, if the filling material has lower thermal conductivity than the
ground, a larger borehole may lead to a larger increase in borehole thermal resistance! The
combined thermal resistance of borehole and ground then increases. With proper design, a
larger borehole diameter could be used to reduce total thermal resistance, reduce internal
heat transfer for U-pipe type BHE by increased shank spacing, and increasing the heat
capacity for favourable short-term behavior.

V. 1. 6. Serial or parallel coupling

Another aspect of interest when considering applications of multiple boreholes is the pros and
cons of parallel and serial hydraulic coupling of the different BHE. Although not a property of
the BHE per se, the hydraulic coupling influences the flow conditions and thus the heat
transfer in the BHE.

V. 2. Coaxial type BHEs

The borehole thermal resistances of coaxial type BHEs determined in some experiments are
listed in Table 3.

Site Type, filling material Borehole

Therm.res.
K/(W/m)
Luleå open, turbulent 0,01
Schwalbach tube-in-tube (steel), sand 0,09-0,13
Sigtuna tube-in-tube (corrugated),concrete 0,09
Grafenberg tube-in-tube 0,09
Djursholm tube-in-tube, ice 0,09
Djursholm tube-in-tube, quartz sand 0,09
Djursholm tube-in-tube, water, heat extr. 0,11
Stocksundstorp soft liner 0,02
Muskö soft liner 0,03
Cormontreuil soft liner 0,03
Lund (laboratory) multipipe (C-pipe) 0,01-0,03
Zurich multipipe (0,03)*
* Estimated value.
Table 3. Borehole thermal resistance (K/(W/m)) of coaxial type BHE

The thermal performance of coaxial type BHEs depends on:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 47 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

 shape of flow channels (annular, multichamber, multipipe, spiral)

 material (soft liner, tube-in-tube)
 borehole filling material.

The open borehole with a concentric inner tube has the lowest borehole thermal resistance of
all borehole heat exchangers investigated. The advantage of this design is that the heat
carrier fluid is in direct contact with the ground, which during turbulent flow results in very
favourable heat transfer capacity. This BHE is also very simple to manufacture and to install.
There are, unfortunately, several disadvantages. It requires that: the borehole wall is stable;
water is used as heat carrier fluid; the geochemical composition of the water does not result in
corrosion or precipitation of minerals in heat exchangers; precautions are taken to avoid water
losses in the store.
The borehole heat exchangers with a tube-in-tube design have a rather high borehole thermal
resistance. In order to insert the relatively stiff tube-in-tube arrangements, there has to be a
certain clearance between the outer tube and the borehole wall. The ratios between the tube
and the borehole diameter for the designs vary from 0.5 - 0.8. The space between the tube
and borehole wall has to be filled with either groundwater or a solid filling material. Situations
such as water-filled boreholes at low temperatures (heat extraction) or boreholes grouted with
standard bentonite will give especially high thermal resistances. Plastic outer tubes, which are
relatively easy to handle, have large thermal resistances. Conventional polyethylene pipes
(SDR11; PN12, PN18) have values of about 0.075 K/(W/m). Assuming a tube-to-borehole
ratio of 0.8 combined with a thermal grout filling of high conductivity (2.4 W/(m,K)) gives a
borehole thermal resistance of 0.055 K/(W/m) (not accounting for internal heat transfer). The
tube-in-tube designs do not seem to offer any distinct advantage compared to common U-
pipe designs, except the possibility to limit internal heat transfer, which may be necessary in
very deep boreholes and low flow rates.
Another alternative aiming at combining the advantages of the open borehole with concentric
inner tube and the tube-in-tube BHE is to use a soft liner (rubber, reinforced polyurethane,
etc.) and an inner plastic tube. These designs have relatively low resistances, but there have
been many problems with leakage and installation of the soft liners.
Coaxial type BHE designs using multiple pipes are still in the development phase. There
seem to be possibilities to achieve low, or even very low, borehole thermal resistances. The
main challenge is currently to find an arrangement (bottom piece, multiple pipes and top
piece) that can be installed without too much difficulty and still ensure that the pipes are very
close to the borehole wall.

V. 3. U-pipe type BHE

V. 3. 1. Single U-pipes
Single U-pipes are the most common type BHE used in the world. In the USA and in Central
Europe they are usually placed in grouted boreholes. During recent years there has been
considerable interest in using thermal grouts. There are now several brands of ready-mixed

GEOTRAINET GSHP 48 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

thermal grouts available commercially. Spacers to keep the shanks separated and close to
the borehole are also used. In Scandinavia and Canada it is common to leave the boreholes
filled with ground water. The borehole water may freeze during peak heat extraction periods.
The borehole thermal resistances of single U-pipes are listed in Table 4.

Site Filling material Borehole

Therm.res.
K/(W/m)
USA, several bentonite 0,13-0,15
USA, several thermal grout 0,09-0,10
Luleå water, heating 0,05-0,06
Norway water, heating 0,05-0,07
Lund (laboratory) water, heating 0,05-0,07
Lund (laboratory) (copper),water, heating 0,03-0,05
Studsvik ice 0,09

Table 4. Borehole thermal resistance (K/(W/m)) of single U-pipes

The borehole thermal resistance of single U-pipes depends on:

 pipes: diameter, thickness, thermal conductivity
 position of pipes: shank spacing
 borehole filling material.
In grouted boreholes it is common to use a polyethylene pipe with diameter of about 40 mm
(SDR 11 1” or PEM DN40 PN10). These pipes have a thermal resistance of 0.075 - 0.078
K/(W/m). A single U-pipe with such pipes inserted with spacers and combined with a thermal
grout filling of high conductivity (2.4 W/(m,K)) should give a borehole thermal resistance of
about 0.08 K/(W/m) (without spacers about 0.09 K/(W/m). Polyethylene pipes with half the
thermal resistance lowers the resistance to 0.06 K/(W/m).
In water-filled boreholes, there will be an enhanced heat transfer between the pipes and the
borehole wall due to convection of the borehole water. This enhancement increases with
higher temperatures, heat transfer rates and magnitude of artesian type water flows. The
values obtained during thermal response tests with heat injection lie in the range 0.05 - 0.07
K/(W/m) with 40 mm pipes (PEM DN40 PN6,3). If these values are adjusted to account for the
much lower fluid pumping rates during actual operation, then the range should be about 0.06 -
0.08 K/(W/m). During heat extraction, when the influence of the natural convection becomes
lower, the values should be about 0.08 - 0.10 K/(W/m). The performance of the water-filled
borehole is better (heat injection) or similar (heat extraction) than for single U-pipes with
spacers in high conductivity grout.

V. 3. 2. Multiple U-pipes
Double U-pipes are common in Central Europe, where they are used in grouted boreholes. In
Sweden, double U-pipes in water-filled boreholes have been used in cooling applications with
large, short-term variations of the heat load. Designs with more than two U-pipes have only
been tried in a few experimental setups. The borehole thermal resistances of multiple U-pipes
are listed in Table 5.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 49 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

Site Type, filling material Borehole

Therm.res.
K/(W/m)
Luleå U2, water, heating 0,03
Lund (laboratory) U2, water, heating 0,035-0,055
Burgdorf U2, water, cooling 0,04
Montezillon U2, bentonite 0,13
Montezillon U2, bentonite, spacer 0,12

Montezillon U2, bent./sand, spacer 0,11

Montezillon U2, quartz sand, spacer 0,08
Grafenberg U2, bentonite, spacer 0,10-0,11
Germany, several U2, bentonite 0,10-0,13
Germany, several U2, thermal grout 0,06-0,08

Table 5. Borehole thermal resistance (K/(W/m))

of multiple U-pipes

The borehole thermal resistance of multiple U-pipes depends on:

 pipes: number of pipes, diameter, thickness, thermal conductivity
 position of pipes: shank spacing
 borehole filling material.
Double U-pipes are typically made of 32 mm polyethylene pipes (PEM DN32 PN12 or PN18).
The pipes are arranged around a central tremie pipe used for injecting grout into the borehole.
The tremie is often left in the borehole. A double U-pipe with spacers and a high conductivity
thermal grout filling should give a borehole thermal resistance of about 0.05 K/(W/m).
Polyethylene pipes with half the thermal resistance through the pipe wall lower the resistance
to 0.035 K/(W/m).
Response tests performed on double U-pipes in water-filled boreholes give resistances of
0.03 - 0.04 K/(W/m). If these values are adjusted to account for the much lower fluid pumping
rates during actual operation, then the range should be about 0.03 - 0.05 K/(W/m during heat
injection and 0.05 - 0.07 K/(W/m) during extraction. The performance of the water-filled
borehole is better than (heat injection) or similar to (heat extraction) double U-pipes with
spacers in high conductivity grout. In Sweden, double pipes installed at depths below 200 m
have used 40 mm polyethylene pipes (PN8).

V. 4. Optimal performance of borehole heat exchangers

A summary of the discussion of optimal performance and possible improvement in sections IV
- V is given in Table 6. The thermal grout is assumed to be have a thermal conductivity of 2.4
W/(m,K), the spacers put the U-pipe shanks at an assumed distance of about 2 mm from the
borehole wall, and the low-resistance pipe has half the thermal resistance of a regular
polyethylene pipe.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 50 Manual for Designers

 SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

Type Filling material Borehole

Therm.res.
K/(W/m)

Single U-pipe (40 mm) water, heat injection 0,06-0,08

Single U-pipe (40 mm) water, heat extraction 0,08-0,10
Single U-pipe (40 mm) thermal grout 0,09
Single U-pipe (40 mm) thermal grout, spacers. 0,08
Single U-pipe (40 mm) thermal grout, spacers, low-resistance pipe 0,06

Double U-pipe (32 mm) water, heat injection 0,03-0,05

Double U-pipe (32 mm) water, heat extraction 0,05-0,07
Double U-pipe (32 mm) thermal grout 0,055
Double U-pipe (32 mm) thermal grout, spacers. 0,05
Double U-pipe (40 mm) thermal grout, spacers, low-resistance pipe 0.035

Triple U-pipe (25 mm) thermal grout, spacers. 0,035

Triple U-pipe (25 mm) thermal grout, spacers, low-resistance pipe 0,025

Open borehole <0,01

Tube-in-tube thermal grout, water 0,055
Soft liner 0,02-0,03
Multiple pipe thermal grout, water 0,01-0,03

Table 6. Estimated ”optimal” borehole thermal resistance (K/(W/m)) for different

kinds of borehole heat exchangers

VI. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography

Allan, M., Kavanaugh, S.P. 1999. Thermal Conductivity of Cementitious Grouts and Impact
on Heat Exchanger Length Design for Ground Source Heat Pumps. HVAC&R
Research, Vol. 5., No.2, April 1999.

Eskilson, P. 1987. Thermal Analyses of Heat Extraction Boreholes. Ph.D. Thesis. Department
of Mathematical Physics, Lund Institute of Technology, Box~118, S-221~00 Lund,
Sweden.

Gehlin, S. 1998. Thermal Response Test – In-situ measurements of thermal properties in

hard rock. Licentiate thesis 1998:37. Luleå University of Technology 1998.

Hellström, G., Kjellsson, E. 1998. Thermal Performance of Borehole Heat Exchangers. Proc.
of Conf. at the Richard Stockton College, Pomona, USA, March 16-17, 1998.

Kavanaugh, S.P., Allan, M.L. 1999. Testing of thermally enhanced cement ground heat
exchanger grouts. ASHRAE Transactions: Symposia 1999, CH-99-2-2.

Kavanaugh, S.P., Rafferty, K. 1997. Ground-Source Heat Pumps. Design of Geothermal

Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings. American Society of Heating,

GEOTRAINET GSHP 51 Manual for Designers

SECTION B. INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN

CHAPTER 6 BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), Atlanta, Georgia. ISBN 1-

883413-52-4.

Littlefield, D., Desai, P. 1986. Buoyant Laminar Convection in a Vertical Cylindrical Annulus,
Journal of Heat Transfer, Vol. 108, November 1986, 814-821.

Mands, E., Sanner, B. 2001. Erfahrungen mit kommerziell durchgeführten Thermal Response
Tests in Deutschland. Geothermische Energie, Nr. 32/33, März/Juni 2001,
Geothermische Vereinigung e.V., Gartenstr. 36, D-49744 Geeste, Germany.

Mathey, B., Pahud, D., Buchi, J. 1996. Geothermie – Energie der Zukunft, Konstanz, 18-20
September 1996.

Müller, R. 1985. Experimentelle und theoretische Untersuchungen an vertikalen

Wärmetauschersonden für Speicherung von Wärme im Erdboden. Unveröffenlichte
Diplomarbeit, Lehrstuhl Physik, Weihenstephan, TU München.

Remund, C.P. 1999. Borehole Thermal Resistance: Laboratory and Field Studies. ASHRAE
Transactions: Symposia 1999, CH-99-2-1.

Smith, M.D., Perry, R.L. 1997. Borehole grouting: Field studies and thermal performance
testing. ASHRAE Transactions: Symposia 1999, CH-99-2-3.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 52 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 7

GEOLOGY by Iñigo Arrizabalaga

I. INTRODUCTION
The geological framework is a mandatory issue in every shallow geothermal system design
procedure. In comparison to conventional heating and cooling installations, the ground is the
additional element in a GSHP. While designing a GSHP installation, an accurate knowledge
of the geological conditions where the GSHP is located and the way of integrating this data
while sizing the heat pump are key parameters in the success of the project.
The differences between rocks and soil, the basic classification of different families of rocks,
understanding its disposition in the ground, knowing the fundamentals of ground mechanical,
thermal and hydrogeological behaviour are necessary matters in the design of medium and
large GSHP systems.

In small systems, a basic geotechnical and hydrogeological knowledge can be useful in order
to avoid safety and environmental risks. A great number of designers come from the building
side of the geothermal system. Very often, loop design, even of large installations, is provided
by the manufacturer of the heat pump several hundred kilometres away from the work site.
They do not have a broad enough knowledge of the ground conditions and the site
investigation methodology to employ in the project design. This investigation, especially in
new drilling sites, will determine the cost and the viability of the geothermal system and the
environmental issues.
The most usual problem is to underestimate the importance of geological issues in the design
process. At best, it will cause over pricing of the project. In other cases, the system will not
run properly.
Common questions are:
 How to choose between an open and a closed loop?
 How can we calculate the length of the closed loop?
 How can we calculate the yield flow from a well to match the building thermal load?
 How does geology determine the drilling method, borehole completion and costs?
A geological approach is necessary from the starting phase of the project. To collect any kind
of geological, geotechnical, hydrogeological and thermogeological information for the project
area will be useful and can save lots of money.
This chapter aims to refresh, clarify and improve the geological knowledge of GSHP
designers coming from the building side of the technology. They will improve the

GEOTRAINET GSHP 53 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 7 GEOLOGY

understanding of how the ground works and make communication between members of the
interdisciplinary project teams easier.

II. GEOTHERMAL ENERGY CONCEPTS

This chapter will try to clarify some concepts about geothermal energy:
a) Where does it come from?
b) What are the main parameters?
c) Geology
d) What is the relationship between thermal energy and water in the ground?
e) Why a pilot borehole?

a). Geothermal energy is the energy stored in the form of heat below the earth surface.
Low Enthalpy Geothermal Energy or Shallow Geothermal Energy is the energy stored at a
very low potential, usually below 25 ºC.
The Ground Source Heat Pump is the most common technology developed to use Shallow or
Low Enthalpy Geothermal Energy, usually, but not always, by means of a heat pump.
Low Enthalpy Geothermal energy has several origins. In many sites employed energy may be
a mixture of:
 Geothermal deep flow. The Earth core reactor provides, on a human scale, an
endless heat flow towards the surface of the planet. As a result, the Geothermal
Gradient averages 3 ºC/100 m depth, and a heat flow rate on the surface of the Earth
2
between 30 and 100 mW/m
 Solar absorbed radiation. Heat transfer at the surface. Several factors have to be
taken into account, such as the fraction of solar radiation diffused into the ground,
water percolation and heat transfer with the air by convection and thermal radiation.
However, the assumption is often made that the temperature of the ground (for the
first 10 m) is a function of the temperature of the surface. Under 10 m, the ground
temperature is no longer sensitive to yearly air temperature variation.
 Ground water advection. Ground water flow is able to transfer large amounts of
energy along the ground. This process, known as advective flow, is a main agent in
many shallow geothermal systems
 Thermal storage capacity of rock. Rock, with its ability to store heat energy, average ≈
3
0,65 kWh/m /ºC, provides a large amount of energy, especially in vertical closed loop
systems where a borehole can involve thousands of cubic metres of rock
 Artificial recharge (regeneration). The storage capacity of the rock may provide an
excellent low-cost seasonal scale thermal store able to manage waste heat from
cooling processes, refrigeration, solar surplus, etc.

b). The main parameters defining thermal properties of the ground are:
- Thermal conductivity of the ground
- Volumetric thermal capacity
- Undisturbed ground temperature.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 54 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 7 GEOLOGY

The ability of the ground to transfer and store heat depends on a number of factors,
principally:
 Rock mineralogy. Generally, the higher the quartz content, the higher the thermal
conductivity
 Density. High density of the material usually means a closed texture and absence of
voids. The higher the density, the higher the thermal conductivity and diffusivity
 Water content. Water presence improves the heat transmission even in the absence
of flow. It fills the voids, increasing the thermal conductivity of the rock or soil.

c). Geology is also the main agent shaping the landscape. Tectonic forces fold and fault
rocks. Weathering, transport and deposition agents are key issues in the tireless
transformation of all geological environments. Landscape conditions will determine the project
site conditions that fit the drilling equipment.
In addition, geology provides good information about mechanical and geotechnical properties
of the rock, which are key influences on the cost of the drilling works (Fig. 1). The main
parameters, according to their cost influence are:
 Rate of penetration (ROP). ROP will depend on various properties of the rock, mainly:
- Fracture degree
- Texture
- Planes of weakness: exfoliation,
stylolites
- Specific gravity and density
- Porosity
- Permeability
- Hardness
- Compressive strength
- Abrasivity
- Elasticity
- Plasticity
 Stability. The ability of the
drilled ground to maintain stable
borehole walls determines three
very important parameters with a
very high impact on the project‟s
final cost:
- Diameter of the borehole
- Auxiliary casing needs
- Mud use needs.

Figure 1. Example of a solid geology map

GEOTRAINET GSHP 55 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 7 GEOLOGY

Figure 2. (top) Hydrogeology, aquifer diagram

Figure 3. Hydrogeological map

d). Hydrogeology is another field to take into account for preliminary analyses (Figs 2 and 3).
Ground water presence is of prime importance in GSHP system design procedures, as
illustrated by the following five points:
 It determines the typology of the geothermal system. In yielding enough aquifers, the
typology of the loop could be directed toward an open loop or Standing Column Well
system, sometimes even as a result of an unexpected water yield of the pilot
borehole. Otherwise, a closed loop system may be the ultimate solution
 The water table position determines the thermal conductivity of the ground

GEOTRAINET GSHP 56 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 7 GEOLOGY

 Advective flow may transfer a huge amount of energy, increasing the apparent
thermal conductivity of the ground and providing higher extraction and rejection ratios
 On the other hand, advection may preclude seasonal thermal storage in the ground
 Ground water pollution is the main environmental risk of GSHP technology. An
adequate knowledge of the hydrogeology of the geothermal site is compulsory to
evaluate pollution risk and to design the sealing sketch for the borehole when
necessary.

e). The pilot borehole

A good example of a geological investigation tool for vertical closed loop shallow geothermal
systems is the pilot borehole. Drilling a pilot borehole with an adequate geological control
provides full value information about:
 Lithology log
 Ground fracture degree
 Hydrogeology
- Water table position
- Aquifers
- Productivity, specific flow rate, drawdown
- Hydrochemistry
- Filling/grouting selection
 Drilling parameters
- Formation stability, voids and holes
- Drill ability
- Diameters
- Auxiliary casing need
- Drilling speed
 Drilling Cost
 A borehole for installation of a PE exchanger for Thermal Response Test (TRT)
 An additional pipe for borehole logging, undisturbed ground temperature, temperature
log before, during and after TRT, other kinds of geophysical logs, etc.

III. TECHNICAL AND PROFESSIONAL RESOURCES

The technical resources needed for this phase will differ according to the scale of the project.
In small size installations, below 30 kW, basic geological knowledge, training and experience
may be enough. Many countries and several autonomous regions have geological services
using comprehensive documentation about the work site, geological and hydrogeological
maps, groundwater databases, groundwater pollution risk, soil and slope maps, etc.

In addition, many drilling companies may provide information about lithology, the geological
column, groundwater prognosis, etc. This helps us to supply the geological information
requested for mining, water and local authorities about the proposed work site.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 57 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 7 GEOLOGY

Larger size installations, over 30 kW, require deeper and more specific geological knowledge.
Integrating a hydrogeologist into the project team could be compulsory, especially in
groundwater-based open loop systems.
The profiles of professionals working in the geothermal, as in the hydrogeological, field vary.
The professional background of people working in this field should be a ground-based
qualification: geology, mining or civil engineering, with a good knowledge of hydrogeology.
The Designer must be able to understand a geological map. He must know, at least, basic
rock classification and be able to identify the main rock types in his work area. He should also
have some basis in structural geology and an understanding of geological relations between
different ground materials, their orientation and deformation processes.
In many medium and large scale projects, it may be compulsory to have a relevant
geothermal qualification in order to get appropriate risk insurance or to integrate the
geothermal item into the building project.

III. 1. Using the resources

Geological knowledge must be integrated into GSHP from the first stage and will be present
throughout the design process. Geology determines directly or indirectly:
- Loop typology: Open, Closed, Standing Column Well
- Thermal properties of ground/groundwater
- Loop viability: digging/drilling system, well/borehole completion
- Environmental issues.
The scope is very complex according to the chosen typology. It could vary from
geological/geotechnical cartography to a pumping test of a groundwater abstraction or re-
injection well.
Chapter 16 provides comprehensive information about site investigation in GSHP design.

IV. ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND ECONOMIC COST BENEFIT

The energy efficiency of a geothermal system is fully related to the typology of the circuit.
Efficiency in a geothermal system ranges from a Seasonal Performance Factor (SPF) of <3 in
many horizontal dug closed loop geothermal systems up to >5 in several groundwater source
open loop systems. For the same typology, e.g. vertical closed loop system, building thermal
load and exchange length performances could range from <3.5 to >4.5 depending on ground
thermal conductivity and groundwater Darcy velocity.

Ground properties, building thermal loads and energy cost will determinate the viability of the
geothermal alternative. Loop typology will define the cost range of the geothermal system.
Vertical closed loop systems can usually supply a few hundred thermal kW. It may easily cost
>1200 € per installed power kW, with a payback time over 12 years.
In contrast, an open loop ground water system can provide several MW of thermal power and
its cost may be cheaper than 100 €/kW with a payback period of a few months.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 58 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 7 GEOLOGY

IV. 1. Regulations
The main specific regulation regarding this domain is about filling and grouting materials and
procedures. Several central Europe countries, such as France, Germany, Austria and
Switzerland require the borehole to be grouted with a sealing compound, usually cement and
bentonite mixtures, in order to avoid aquifer pollution. But usually, after grout placement and
casing removal, no further tests are carried out to verify the grouting position. These
regulations can be useful in some geological conditions, e.g. in karstic terrains, low water
table positions, gypsum terrains, boulder unconsolidated terrains, but not in others.
In other countries, such as the Scandinavian area, the borehole is filled with water. The
wellhead casing annulus is grouted and the inner space between U-pipe and casing is sealed
with expansive rubber packing. This completion is considered safe enough to ensure that no
pollution of aquifers occurs from the surface through the borehole.
Many countries are unregulated. As in many things, the sealing procedure must be
conditioned by geology and hydrogeology. Often, prevention of cross pollution between
different potential aquifers is not possible with grouting alone. This needs specific treatment,
for example, the placement of a grouted casing isolating the upper aquifer before the lower
aquifer is drilled. A very similar situation may take place in case of strong artesian conditions.
On the other hand, a requirement to seal a low permeability formation without aquifers along
the entire borehole is unnecessary and only increases the bore field cost and decreases the
thermal transmission through the borehole annulus.
The same prescription is not always the best one for different illnesses. Qualified staff must
study and design the safe solutions for each hydrogeological situation.

V. CONCLUSIONS

Geology defines the ground behaviour of thermal energy. A fitted design of a medium or large
size shallow geothermal system cannot be done without an analysis of geological issues.
Designers need to understand heat transfer basic concepts in the ground, the different factors
affecting the energy budget, heat recharge and discharge and the role of ground water. They
must also know some basic geology and hydrogeology, the main rock formations and
lithologies, the position of the aquifers and the vulnerability, at least of the specific work area,
in order to choose the best circuit typology in each place. They must be aware of
consequences and risks of a bad geological evaluation.
The most common consequence of misuse is increased cost and the misfunction of the
designated geothermal system. In the case of inappropriate circuit typology selection, a more
expensive alternative may be chosen, increasing the cost of the geothermal system.
Sometimes, the economical limit may be exceeded and the geothermal alternative will be
rejected. A poor knowledge of the thermal properties of the ground can also lead to the wrong
decisions. An even worst option can be in the case of underdesign. The system will never
work properly or troubles will appear after a few years of operation. Moreover, an incorrect
geological evaluation can produce geotechnical and environmental hazards, some even with
penal consequences.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 59 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 7 GEOLOGY

V. 1. The future
Future evolution of this matter will involve a stronger influence of professionals with ground-
related backgrounds in geothermal design. In medium- and large-scale projects, their
knowledge will be compulsory inside a multidisciplinary work team. Determining ground
properties, ground water behaviour, thermal storage ability of the project site or choosing the
best and safest environmental heat transfer completion sketch of the borehole will be a
specialist task. Hydrogeological and geophysical tools will be widely employed and adapted
to improve bore field design and work quality control.

VI. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography
Many geothermal design handbooks dedicate at least a chapter to explain some basic
geological concepts.

Websites
European Union countries have a wide net of geological surveys, many with web services
offering useful information, geological and hydrogeological information, water spot data
bases, ground thermal conductivity inventory, groundwater temperatures, hydrochemistry, etc.

See: http://www.uni-mainz.de/FB/Geo/Geologie/GeoSurv.html

Other associations of interest are:

International Association of Hydrogeologists (IAH): www.iah.org

National geologist, mining and civil work engineering associations have plenty of information
on their websites about these topics.

See: http://geology.about.com/ where you will find a lot of geological information to retrofit
your secondary school geological lessons.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 60 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 8

DRILLING by Iñigo Arrizabalaga

I. INTRODUCTION

Shallow geothermal systems are mainly based on boreholes and wells. These are
fundamental elements that define closed loop vertical systems, energy foundations and open
circuits based on ground water.

Knowledge about the different drilling methods and tools, the field of application, their
limitations, costs and risks are principal issues. In the same way the designer should know
about casing systems, piping alternatives, filling and sealing materials, as well as methods of
execution.
The designer should be capable of choosing the appropriate drilling method for the current
system, be familiar with the tools, be capable of determining diameters and the necessity for
auxiliary casing and forecast the costs in order to evaluate the technical and economical
feasibility of different alternatives.
The most important questions for a designer are related to the most appropriate drilling
method, optimum diameters, piping and sealing material and methods, necessary auxiliary
casing, estimated costs and the risks of this kind of work.
The designer must know that the costs of closed loop vertical system drillings can range from
50 - 70% of a geo-exchange circuit‟s extra charges, in comparison to a conventional air
conditioning system. Getting maximum definition from the initial feasibility study stage is
therefore of the utmost importance. The first step in the process of dimensioning a ground
source heat pump is to define the demand of the system. This process should include an
analysis of the different possible alternatives, ranging from most to least economical, based
on the geological and hydrogeological conditions of a work site, and excluding the non-
feasible ones.
The objective of this chapter is to give a brief overview of the drilling. The complexity of this
theme is important, but the aim is to illustrate the principal drilling methods applicable to the
construction of geothermal exchange circuits.

II. CONCEPTS

This sub-section aims to describe the principal drilling systems used in the vast majority of
geothermal system constructions, especially for installations <30 kW. The fundamental part of
a geothermal system is of course the geothermal exchange circuit. There are geothermal
installations of low temperature without pumps, but none without a geothermal exchange
circuit.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 61 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

II. 1. Drilling methods

Boreholes and drillings have a long history. There is evidence of boreholes over 2000 years
old, hundreds of metres deep and drilled with a primitive rig, using bamboo canes as drill
pipes.
Traditionally, there has been a distinction between two common drilling methods: percussion
and rotation methods. Nevertheless, other methods exist as well, which either contain
elements from the previous two, like the roto-percussion method, or are relatively recent
technological developments that, despite evolving from previous ones, present important
peculiarities: sonic drilling, horizontal directional drilling, etc.

Figure 1. Drilling methods

 Percussion
In this section, some authors would include two well construction types: digging and direct
push. Because of its scarce use, further elaboration is not pursued here. Two interesting
aspects are worth mentioning:
– Currently there are pre-manufactured piles for thrusting (deep foundation structures
that are being placed in the earth with repetitive impact, until no further penetration is
possible) that either incorporate an exchange circuit or have a hollow core for a circuit
placement at its disposal

– Direct push systems are improving their performance in an important way. These
systems could be the economical option for installing coaxial exchangers in non-
consolidated formations.

The main percussion method is cable tool percussion. According to Calver “This drilling
method uses a heavy bit that is repeatedly lifted and dropped that crushes and breaks the
formation. With a cable tool rig, an experienced driller can drill through any formation,

GEOTRAINET GSHP 62 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

including large crevices and caverns that can cause problems with other drilling methods
……..Drilling is accomplished with a tight drill line. The pitman arm and spudder beam impart
an up-and-down motion to the cable and drill bit. The length of cable is adjusted so that on
the down stroke the tools stretch the line as the bit hits the bottom of the hole, striking with a
sharp blow and immediately retracting. The twist, or lay, of the cable imparts a slight turning
motion to the tools so the bit hits a new face with each stroke. Left lay cable is used so that
the twisting action tightens the tools screwed connections on each upstroke. If the borehole is
dry, water is added to form a slurry that is bailed out. Usually about 1.5 m of well hole is
drilled between bailing”
The slow rate of penetration (ROP) of this method, usually <10 m per day, raises the costs
well above the closed loop systems‟ feasibility limit. Its use in practice is consequently
restricted to:

– Open loop, construction of deep wells, with high yield ratio in unconsolidated
aquifers or karst areas
– Energy foundation; drilling in boulder zones for in situ pile construction.

 Rotary
Rotary drilling is the best known drilling method for oil, mining and hydrogeological
exploration. The basic proceedings consist of transmitting a torque, with a rotation table or a
rotation head, to a train of threaded drill pipes supplied with drill bits at the tip. This drill bit can
be a tricone for crunch drilling or a core drill for drilling with continuous sample recuperation.
In the last few years, a new bit type has been incorporated from the world of hydrocarbon: the
PDC (Polycrystaline Diamond Compact). Furthermore, in superficial drillings, <50 m, in
unconsolidated materials and normally in foundations, the augering system is the common
one. Here the excavated material is extracted with an Archimedes bolt, keeping the hole
opened.
The majority of the rotary methods, however, use mud as wellbore fluid and are classified as
direct or inverse rotations, depending on the function of the drilling mud‟s flow:
– Direct circulation: mud is pumped into the drill pipe, cleaning the bottom of the hole
using the nozzles at the end of the bit. The mud returns to the surface through the
annulus between borehole and drill pipe. The mud carries cuttings and detritus from
the bottom of the hole. Direct circulation methods fit well for narrow diameter
boreholes, <300 mm, and in consolidated formations with compressive strength of up
to 150 Mpa
– Reverse circulation: mud is pumped down the annulus and back up through the drill
pipe. The pressure inside the drill pipe sinks, which permits the mud and the detritus
to evacuate towards the surface where it is deposited in the decantation vessel.
These systems are used in wide diameter boreholes, >300 mm, and in
unconsolidated formations.

 Roto-percussion (Rotary hammer)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 63 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

Roto-percussion methods are currently the most common drilling methods for geothermal
borehole drilling, integrating elements of both rotary and percussion methods. The drilling tool
is ether a jackhammer or a hydraulic hammer that breaks the formation with alternate striking
at frequencies between 500 and 2000 strikes per minute. The hammer is activated through
the drill pipe and put down by a torque. It constantly changes the point of impact, thus
avoiding wedging the tool and facilitating the rock disintegration and the borehole‟s verticality.
Cuttings are evacuated by means of water or compressed air.
Roto-percussion systems are classified according to the point of impact:
– Top hammer. The striking occurs at the head of the drill pipe and is transmitted to
the hammer at the base of the chain. This is a frequent method in shallow blasting
boreholes, <50m. It‟s the standard drilling method for drilling in quarry blast pits and
public work as well as in tunnels and gallery drilling
– Down the hole hammer. A piston within the hammer at the bottom of the drillstring
strikes the rockface. High-pressure air is injected through the drill pipe, normally 12-
30 Bar, causing an alternative movement at the hammer‟s trigger. The trigger strikes
the drill bit, pushing out the compressed air through the drill bit‟s nozzle, thus
completing the sweep, and transports the rock cuttings to the surface. Depending on
the direction of the drilling fluid there are two main types:
- Direct circulation: fluid is injected through the drill pipe and returns through the
annulus. This system is appropriate for strongly or very strongly consolidated
formations and great depths, with diameters comparatively smaller, <300 mm, as
well as with small occurrence of water or with deep water table
- Reverse circulation: double drill pipes are used. Fluid is injected through the
annulus between both pipes. An inverter, connecting the wall of the drill pipe to
the hammer, is placed directly above the hammer. Once struck and swept, the
striding surface brings the fluid with the filling to the inside of the inner drill pipe,
as it returns to the surface. This method is appropriate for use in formations,
alternating between consolidated and unconsolidated, for wide diameter drilling,
>300 mm, and for boreholes with high water occurrence and high water table
level.
Drilling in strongly consolidated formations with deep overburden, or unconsolidated levels, is
a major challenge for any drilling system. From the classical solution, different solution
methods have emerged, such as oversized and auxiliary casing and telescoping, for
overcoming these areas without diameter loss. These are systems that enable drilling and
piping in one single manoeuvre, thus securing the formation‟s stability, the absence of
collapses and cuttings recovery – even in caves found frequently in karstic areas – and
preventing interruptions in the flow back. The most common systems are double rotary head
and double piping: the Odex type and the Symmetrix type.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 64 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

II. 2. Drilling fluids

A fundamental part of drilling is a correct selection of drilling fluids. Normally it is water or mud
based on a mixture of water and bentonite clay. Nevertheless, based on the mineralogy of the
terrain, the composition of the ground water or the formation pressure and the blow out risk, a
great variety of compounds can be added.

Figure 2.
Types of drilling
fluids

High-pressure air is also a very common fluid. The air can be mixed with water, in order to
reduce the dust, and eventually with foaming products to facilitate the cuttings and water
lifting as well as the cleanliness. Drilling fluids serve multiple purposes, mainly these:
- Basic functions: Cooling of the drill bit
- Removal of cuttings as they are produced
- Transporting cuttings up the hole
Also, they are often used to:
- Stabilize the hole to prevent cave-ins
- Minimize formation fluid migration into the hole
- Minimize fluid losses to the formation
- Lubricate mud pump, bit and the annulus between the drill string and the hole
- Reduce drill string corrosion
- Suspend cuttings during periods of non-circulation
- Assist in collection and interpretation of samples and diagraphies
- Release cuttings in the mud pit.

II. 3. Cost assessment

The drilling cost in a geo-exchange circuit project could be more than 50% higher than for
conventional technology. The drilling costs vary in a very important way. A borehole, 60 m
deep and with a 90 mm diameter, drilled in cohesive unconsolidated materials, could cost 30
€/m. On the other hand, a 1500 m deep borehole for geothermal or hydrocarbon exploration
could surpass 1000 €/m. Concerning closed vertical circuits and formations with a good rate
of penetration (>100 m/d), the drilling costs lie somewhere between 20 and 40 €/m. Major
changes can occur, depending on the country and the conditions of the market: equipment
disposability, demand, etc.
The main determining factors of drilling costs, concerning the terrain, are these:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 65 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

- depth and diameter

- kind of formation/auxiliary casing need
- consolidated: limestone, sandstones, shale
- non-consolidated: sand, gravel, mud, boulders
- hardness of formation/abrasivity
- fracture degree
- groundwater: water head and flow rate.
Moreover, there are a number of factors when studying the construction of a geothermal
borehole area. Those with the greatest impact are:
- available surface
- foundation configuration, drain grid, earth grid,..
- time scheduling structure works: digging, piles, walling….
- interferences between subcontractors
- rig site preparation
- cuttings and/or mud management
- waste disposal
- other parties services affect, electric grid, telephone, gas, water, tunnel,..
- ground water evacuation

II. 4. Risk evaluation

Another drilling-related aspect of major importance is the assessment of risks related to this
kind of work. These are principally broken down into five risk-related categories:
 Safety and health at the well site
 Environmental risk: affect on water supplies, springs, crossed pollution, undesirable
mixtures between different aquifers
 Energy risk: mis-design, poor execution, under/over calculation, low performance,
low comfort
 Economic risk: bad cost/benefit balance, under yielding flow rate, bad quality water
supply
 Geotechnical risk: structural damages, foundations, railroads, roads.

All of these aspects should be considered and evaluated, based on the field conditions.
Drilling requires costly equipment and specialized personnel. When designing a drilling
programme, a further distinction has to be made between domestic geothermal projects, < 30
kW, and institutional and commercial installations. For the former, contacting companies with
experience in the project area could be enough. They will be familiar with drilling conditions,
risks and required permits for the area, and can thus keep the designers informed on the
proceedings.
For large projects, >30 kW, it is recommended that a pilot borehole is drilled with an adequate
hydrogeological control, as the first step of the project. This borehole will be piped for the TRT
as well and will make it possible to determine the lithology, rate of penetration, aquifers, water

GEOTRAINET GSHP 66 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

table position, ground water yield ratio, need for auxiliary casing and other information so that
the best drilling programme is chosen and also for cost assessment.

III. TECHNICAL AND PROFESSIONAL RESOURCES

The designer should know about the main drilling systems, their requirements, influence of
the geological conditions of the task, size, manoeuverability and drilling equipment mobility,
as well as auxiliary means required. One should also know about the limitations and costs of
every system.

In some countries and regions, the drilling project planner should have accredited knowledge
in geology, mining or civil engineering, with a thorough education in ground materials.
The designer should choose the drilling method using the smallest possible diameter in order
to guarantee a correct installation of the selected piping and filling, and should do this at
minimum cost and impact. The most common option for consolidated formations and hard
terrain is down the hole hammer. Down the hole hammer very often gets ROP higher than 25
m/h, usually with diameters between 127 and 140 mm and depths exceeding 150 m.

Drilling fluid Usually water-based drilling mud

Telescoping casing Several drilling diameters

ODEX
OD Systems TUBEX
Up to 25 m depth
Rota-ODEX
Rota-OD
Up to 40 m depth Figure 3.
Unconsolidated
Double Rotary Head Up to 150 m depth formations

In unconsolidated formations, direct circulation may not be feasible due to the collapses it
causes in the formation. The solution is often to install a temporary casing and decrease the
borehole diameter (telescopic boring). This technique can double the cost per cased metre.
Reverse circulation can solve this problem but requires a much larger drilling diameter, and
usually mud must be prepared. The diameter, the volume of filling stuff and cuttings and the
cost of the borehole increases.
Drilling performance and cost vary widely, based on the driller and the rig crew. The
experience, training, dexterity and responsibility of the crew are the most difficult variables to
estimate when planning drilling operations. Their influence on the costs of the drilling
operation is very often crucial. We frequently find several rigs of the same model working in
the same place with very different yields.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 67 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

IV. ENERGY EFFICIENCY

From an energy efficiency point of view, the influence of the drilling method used for closed
loops is limited. The selected method determines the drilling diameter. For example, the
boreholes made by reverse circulation require a minimum diameter of 300 mm. In practice,
this causes an important increase in the borehole‟s thermal resistivity in every situation where
the borehole filling‟s thermal conductivity is lower than that of the ground. As a consequence,
a superior temperature gradient is needed in order to transmit the same heat flow as minor
diameter drilling, thus providing lower performance.

In open systems with groundwater pumping and re-injection, a poor decision on drilling
method could, among other consequences, cause damage to the formation, reduction of the
specific flow rate and decrease the dynamic level. This would increase the pumping pressure
and the energy consumption.

Figure 4. Drilling rates (after: Gene Culver 1998, chapter 6, Drilling and Well Construction.
In Linieu, P. (ed). Geothermal Direct Use Engineering and Design Guidebook (3rd edition))

Drilling is the most sensitive variable in feasibility analysis of low temperature geothermal
systems. In big projects – vertical circuits of more than 3000 m – cost differences of + 10% in
borehole constructions cause greater annual pay-back variations. Choosing an adequate
method for obtaining maximum yields at minimum cost is therefore of the utmost importance.
At the same time, the method should be compatible with the other simultaneous duties in the
task. In open circuits, a poor choice of method or a defective work design can cause
unacceptable levels of turbulence, silt and sand in the pump and the thermal exchanger, thus
ruining the entire operation and the previous investment.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 68 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 8 DRILLING

V. CONCLUSIONS

The designer should have knowledge about the main borehole drilling methods, the
advantages and disadvantages and the area of application for each technology. Furthermore,
the designer should know about the costs associated with each system and the possible risks
associated with a bad design or malpractice. The risks of a bad design or malpractice can
prove important. Five possible risk fields can be discerned:
 Safety and health at the borehole field/well site
 Environmental risk: affects water supplies, springs, crossed pollution, undesired
mixtures between different aquifers …
 Energy risk: mis-design, bad execution, under/over calculation, low performance, low
comfort
 Economic risk: bad cost/benefit balance, under yielding flow rate, bad quality water
supply
 Geotechnical risk: structural damages, foundations, railroads, roads.
In the majority of geothermal exchange circuits, drilling is a principal variable in execution
costs. Hence, reducing the costs through possible advancements in drilling technology would
have a multiplying effect on the geothermal energy installations.
In a few years, new drilling systems will be developed that are adapted to low temperature
geothermics, smaller and more manoeuverable rigs, smaller drilling diameters, bigger ROP,
etc.

VI. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography
There are good drilling manuals published in almost every language, though the majority of
them are oriented towards deep borehole drilling. In Spanish, the following books are of
interest:
Pozos y sondeos
Carlos López Jimeno et al. 2006. Manual de sondeos (2 volúmenes) UPM. ETSI Minas de
Madrid.
Drilling: The manual of methods, applications, and management. 1997. Australian Drilling
Industry Training Committee Limited.

Websites
There are also many useful web sites. Some of these are:
http://www.geoheat.oit.edu/pdf/tp65.pdf
http://www.welldrillingschool.com/courses/pdf/DrillingMethods.pdf
http://www.atlascopco.com
http://www.bauer.de
http://www.americawestdrillingsupply.com/
http://www.hfdrilling.co.uk/products/overburden_drilling_systems

GEOTRAINET GSHP 69 Manual for Designers

GEOTRAINET GSHP 70 Manual for Designers
 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9

SITE INVESTIGATION (GROUND CONDITIONS / LICENCES AND PERMITS)

by David Banks

I. INTRODUCTION
This chapter considers the importance of pre-investigation before finalizing a ground source
heating and cooling (GSHP) design and commissioning a system. It will argue that there are
at least three phases to pre-investigation:
 Desk Study. What is already known about the ground conditions and subsurface
hazards at the site in question? Can you predict what hazards and risks you are likely
to encounter when excavating or drilling?
 Legal and Regulatory Issues. What permits do you require before (a) commencing
drilling or (b) commencing operating a scheme? What information is a regulatory body
likely to require before granting permission?
 Site Investigation. Under what circumstances will you need to use geophysics, trial
drilling / excavation, test pumping or thermal response testing to characterize ground
conditions? How do you perform and interpret these tests?
Note that there is a degree of interaction and overlap between these three categories. The
quantity and quality of pre-existing knowledge about ground conditions will determine how
much additional site investigation is necessary. A regulatory body may require a formal risk
assessment (desk study) or the results of a pumping test (site investigation) before permitting
a GSHP scheme.

II. WHY SHOULD A DESIGNER CARE ABOUT PRE-INVESTIGATION?

If a designer (or, indeed, a driller or installer) does not invest time and effort in pre-
investigation, then there is a risk that a borehole will be drilled “blind” and unexpected hazards
will be encountered.
For example:
 Contaminated ground – with health and safety risks to personnel, risks of
contaminating deeper aquifers
 Buried services – telecommunications cables, high pressure gas pipelines, mine
workings, underground railways. You‟d better make sure your insurance is up to
date!!
 Multiple aquifers, artesian groundwater conditions.
Moreover, you also need to be able to apply sensible hydrogeological parameters (hydraulic
conductivity, porosity, storage, transmissivity, groundwater head) and thermogeological
parameters (thermal conductivity, ground temperature, volumetric heat capacity) when

GEOTRAINET GSHP 71 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

designing your GSHP scheme. Having some knowledge of geological and hydrogeological
conditions at the site will enable you to make sensible choices for these parameters and thus
to select efficient and sustainable designs. Better still, if you can obtain empirical, site-specific
determinations of these parameters, rather than just using generic values from literature, you
will have far more confidence in your design and will be able to refine it with far smaller
margins of uncertainty.

III. DESK STUDY AND IMPACT / RISK ASSESSMENT

Before commencing any penetrative investigation works for a ground source heating or
cooling (GSHP) scheme, and even before applying for licences and permissions, it will be
necessary to carry out:
 A desk study, to give as good an indication as possible of the ground conditions you
are likely to encounter
 Some form of impact assessment or risk assessment, to identify the possible
geological or geotechnical risks that you may encounter when drilling or excavating.
This will enable you to develop plans and working methodologies to minimize these
risks to an acceptable level.

In considering a “desk study” here, we are not talking about the design of a borehole or trench
array or of the surficial portions of a GSHP scheme. We will restrict our consideration simply
to an assessment whose main concern is to answer the question:

“Do we know what ground conditions and geological sequence we are likely to encounter
when we start drilling or excavating?”
As part of this assessment, we will most likely perform the following evaluations:
 Develop a risk-based Health and Safety plan for the drilling / excavation work
 Identify any buried services that we may encounter during our drilling or excavation
work. These may include (but may not be limited to):
- water mains and sewerage pipes
- culverted streams
- gas mains
- electricity cables
- telecommunications / fibre optic cables
- strategic gas mains or fuel transport pipelines
- underground storage tanks
- transport tunnels, underground railways
- underground rooms (secret bunkers!)
- mines and known caves (especially if used for recreational purposes)
- archaeological remains
Before commencing drilling or excavating, we will normally also use a cable
avoidance tool (CAT), firstly at the surface and then in the base of a shallow hand-
dug inspection pit, to confirm the absence of buried structures. Note that a CAT is not

GEOTRAINET GSHP 72 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

a toy and must only be used by a skilled, trained operative. Note also, that it will only
detect certain types of buried conduits and will not detect all services.
Finally, you also need to make a note of any above-ground services - for example,
suspended electricity cables or telephone lines - and establish the safe working
distance for a drilling rig or excavator from these cables (this may be governed by
legislation)
 Geological and hydrological prognosis
Can we predict what geological strata / succession we will encounter when drilling? -
and thus select appropriate drilling methods?

o Is there a risk of encountering artesian groundwater conditions? If we

unexpectedly encounter strong artesian flows of water it can be very difficult
to bring them under control. Uncontrolled artesian wastage of groundwater
will be contrary to water resources legislation in many countries and could
lead to prosecution or enforcement. If artesian conditions can be predicted,
they can be managed by an experienced driller using responsible casing and
grouting techniques
o Is there a risk of encountering multiple aquifer horizons? The uncontrolled
hydraulic interconnection of independent aquifer horizons will be contrary to
water resources legislation in many countries. Such horizons can be kept
separate by an experienced driller using responsible casing and grouting
techniques
o Is a thick evaporite sequence likely to be encountered? Evaporite minerals
(e.g. halite, anhydrite, gypsum) carry a significant risk of being dissolved or
hydrated by leakage of groundwater along a borehole unless rigorous drilling
and grouting techniques are employed. Major geotechnical damage has been
allegedly caused at Staufen, Germany, by groundwater migrating along the
axes of closed loop GSHP boreholes and hydrating anhydrite to gypsum, in
turn resulting in mineral swelling and ground heave (Goldscheider & Bechtel,
2009).
 Is there any risk of encountering contaminated land or groundwater beneath the site
(a historical land-use survey will be of value here)? If so, there will be additional
Health and Safety concerns for site personnel. It will usually also be necessary to
make contact with the relevant Environmental Regulator or local authority to develop
drilling / excavation methods that are (a) safe and (b) which do not risk further
spreading the contamination in the groundwater, surface or airborne environment.
Furthermore, any cuttings / spoil from the borehole or excavation may have to be
treated as hazardous waste - it will need to be handled and disposed of appropriately
 Is there any risk that our drilling / excavation work, or indeed the eventual operation of
a GSHP scheme, will adversely affect any external:
- water body or resources

GEOTRAINET GSHP 73 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

- environmental habitat (nature reserve, site of special scientific interest etc.)

- infrastructure
- groundwater abstraction (neighbouring well or spring). Are you within the source
protection zone of any public water supply well? Be aware that your drilling
activity could release turbidity or mobilize chemicals that could find their way into
a water supply
- neighbouring ground source heating / cooling scheme?
 Will the operation of our scheme carry a risk of ground movement or subsidence (see
“evaporites” under Point 3 above)? In particular:
- will a ground source heating scheme result in significant amounts of frozen
ground? This may carry a risk of “frost heave”. Is this acceptable?

- will our GSHP scheme be operating at high temperatures for prolonged

periods? If so, there may be some risk of thermal expansion of the ground.
Probably not a major risk for GSHP schemes in a normal operational range.
Order of magnitude?? Maybe a few mm to > 10 mm in the worst cases
- will thermal expansion of pore waters due to warming cause a temporary
increase in pore pressures that may reduce the stability of a sediment
sequence?
- will repeated freeze / thaw cycles lead to the settlement of thick sedimentary
sequences?
- will repeated freeze / thaw cycles lead to damage of grout backfill and loss of
grout integrity (may be an issue with bentonite-rich grouts - VDI 2001)?
- will pumping groundwater from an open-loop well lead to significant declines
in groundwater head and thus to risk of settlement or compaction of clay-rich
or organic-rich soils?
- does the pumped groundwater from an open-loop borehole contain significant
amounts of suspended sediment? (It shouldn‟t do, if the well has been
properly cased, grouted and screened). If so, there is a possibility that you
are simply pumping away the ground beneath your feet and risking settlement
in the future.
For more advice on these issues, refer to Chapter 13 of Banks (2008).

IV. PERMITS AND LICENCES

The EU‟s Water Framework Directive (2000/60/EC or WFD), and its daughter Groundwater
Directive (2006/118/EC), are the primary pieces of European legislation that regulate our use
of groundwater and subsurface heat.

They clearly set a framework for the management of (a) the water resources (quantity) and (b)
the water quality of water bodies such as groundwater aquifers. Nevertheless, the WFD‟s
pronouncements on heat are open to considerable scope for interpretation. Paragraph 33
states that:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 74 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

“Pollution” means the direct or indirect introduction, as a result of human activity, of

substances or heat into the air, water or land which may be harmful to human health or the
quality of aquatic ecosystems or terrestrial ecosystems directly depending on aquatic
ecosystems, which result in damage to material property, or which impair or interfere with
amenities and other legitimate uses of the environment.
This does seem to imply that:
- The introduction of heat to the ground or groundwater can cause pollution, but only if
a relevant risk scenario can be identified. The introduction of heat to the ground or
groundwater can also be viewed as a positive action if it creates or enhances a
resource
- The extraction of heat (introduction of “coolth”) is not classed as pollution.
Furthermore, paragraph 31 of the WFD defines a “Pollutant” as “any substance liable to cause
pollution”. This causes British environmental regulators great problems because “heat” (e.g. from a
closed loop GSHP scheme) is not a substance and cannot therefore necessarily be controlled as a
pollutant. Hot water (from an open loop scheme) is, however, a substance and can be controlled.
No doubt different EU nations have found different ways of interpreting these statements and this
may partly be reflected in the variety of different regulatory approaches.

IV. 1. General permissions

Consider whether any of the following permits are required before commencing drilling or
excavating:
 Permission from land-owners - not only to drill on their land, but to gain access across it
for an excavator or a drilling rig
 Permission from a utilities company: to drill or excavate in the protection zone around a
high pressure gas or strategic fuel pipeline, or other services
 Permission from a water utilities company to drill or excavate within the Source Protection
Zone of a public (or other protected) water supply
 Permission may also be required from a Planning Authority. In the UK, however, there is a
general consensus that Planning Permission is not usually required for a borehole,
provided that there are no permanent head-works above ground level.
In some, but not all, EU nations, permission may be required from a Water Resources Regulator, a
Mining Regulator or a National Geological Survey before a borehole is commenced.
In England / Wales for example, the situation is unclear. Permission is required from the
Environment Agency to drill a borehole for water (e.g. open loop system), and there is also a
requirement to notify the British Geological Survey of any borehole drilled for water or minerals. But
no permission is currently (early 2009) required in England or Wales (from anyone!) to drill a
closed loop GSHP borehole for heat and there is no requirement to notify anyone.
Be aware that in areas of active or historic underground mining, there may be a requirement to
obtain a permit from a mining authority before commencing drilling. In the UK, a permit from the
Coal Authority is required before drilling in any coal-bearing strata or penetrating any active or
abandoned workings. The process of obtaining such a permit should serve to focus the driller‟s
mind on the potential risks resulting from contaminated mine water and mine gas (asphyxiating

GEOTRAINET GSHP 75 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

CO2 or explosive methane) and on the risks of loss of drilling fluid or grout into open abandoned
mine cavities.
When a borehole is completed, it is good practice to submit construction details, a location map
and a drilling log to the national repository of geological information (often, the national Geological
Survey). This may be a legal requirement in many nations.

IV. 2. Closed loop schemes

In most countries, it is fair to say that closed loop GSHP schemes are more loosely regulated than
open loop schemes. In some countries, no permission may be required from any authority (e.g.
England & Wales, at present - see above), because the borehole is not extracting any physical
substance from the ground. The Environmental Authorities merely do what they can to encourage
installers to follow a code of good practice (e.g. Section 10 of EA 2008).
In other countries, closed loop boreholes may fall under specific Geothermal, Mining, Water or
Environmental legislation.
In Switzerland, for example, closed loop boreholes are regulated by Water / Environmental
legislation and there are even “exclusion zones” where no such boreholes are permitted, in order
to protect groundwater resources and abstractions from indiscriminate drilling (Rybach, 2003). In
Germany (VDI 2000), closed loop GSHP schemes may fall under Water Resource legislation (i.e.
defined as “water usage”, even though groundwater is not physically abstracted) and also under
Mining Legislation (although this is typically applied only to borehole installations >100 m).

IV. 3. Open loop schemes

Open loop GSHP schemes involve the abstraction and discharge of water - usually
groundwater - and thus fall squarely under the Water Framework Directive and the national
transpositions thereof.
Normally, national legislation will require some form of license for the abstraction of
groundwater from a well, borehole or spring, at least above a certain threshold. In
3
England/Wales, any abstraction over 20 m per day requires an abstraction licence,
regardless of whether the water is re-injected back to the aquifer. A prerequisite for the
licence will be some form of impact assessment of the hydraulic effects of the abstraction on
nearby wells and groundwater-supported habitats. The regulator will often require a pumping
test to be carried out. In some cases, where the available water resources of a groundwater
body (an aquifer) are fully utilized, a licence may not be granted unless 100% of the water is
reinjected to the aquifer from whence it came.
A separate permit may be required to discharge the water back to the aquifer or to a surface
water body (river, lake, etc.). In the UK this is termed a discharge consent. A risk assessment
of the likely impacts (e.g. heat pollution) resulting from the discharge may be required. The
regulator may set limits on:
- the maximum permitted temperature of the discharge
- the permitted water quality of the discharge
- the flow rate of the discharge
- and, maybe, the maximum net heat rejection (MWh/a). This approach may become
more common with the increasing density of open loop cooling schemes in urban

GEOTRAINET GSHP 76 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

areas, where the thermal capacity of aquifers may be approaching a critical point
(Ferguson & Woodbury, 2006; Fry, 2009).
If the thermally “spent” water from an open loop scheme is discharged to sewer, permission
will usually be required from (and a fee payable to) the relevant utilities undertaker or local
municipality.
In some EU nations, the operation of GSHP open loop schemes may fall under specific
Geothermal legislation or even Mining legislation, rather than solely Water Resources
legislation. VDI (2000) details how open loop GSHP systems are licensed in Germany.

V. SITE INVESTIGATION

In many European nations, where the shallow geology is very well mapped and the
hydrogeological conditions are well understood, it could be argued that there is little need for
a pilot / investigation borehole merely to confirm the geology.

In areas where the geology and hydrogeology are poorly known, there will be value in sinking
a pilot borehole before full-scale GSHP scheme construction. Indeed, VDI (2001)
recommends a pilot boring, which should be geophysically logged, for all GSHP schemes
exceeding 30 kW peak capacity.
The other function of a pilot borehole is to be able to undertake two types of testing, that will
have a significant impact on the subsequent design and dimensioning of a ground source
heating and cooling scheme. These are:
 hydraulic testing (“test pumping”) - to determine transmissivity (and thence hydraulic
conductivity), storage and well efficiency. These are particularly important for
designing an open loop GSHP scheme
 thermal response testing (TRT) - to determine thermal transmissivity (and thence
average thermal conductivity) and borehole thermal resistance. These are particularly
important for designing a closed loop GSHP scheme.
Don‟t forget, a pilot or test borehole is seldom wasted money. It can usually be converted to a
functioning closed loop GSHP borehole or open loop water well that can be commissioned as
part of your final scheme.

VI. HYDRAULIC TESTING - PUMPING TESTS

The process of test pumping a water well is familiar to all hydrogeologists and we will not
spend a lot of time here describing the procedure. A good introduction is provided by Misstear
et al. (2006) and the definitive collection of pumping test interpretation techniques has been
written by Kruseman et al. (1990). In brief, in a hydraulic pumping test:
- we measure the “static” rest groundwater level (h0) in an aquifer (strictly speaking, we
should talk about groundwater “head”. Head is a measure of hydraulic potential energy.
- we then start to pump a drilled well in the aquifer at a constant rate (Q). In other
words, we stress the aquifer

GEOTRAINET GSHP 77 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

- we measure the aquifer‟s response to stress by measuring the groundwater level (h)
at given times (t), either in the pumped well (of radius rw) or in an observation well at a
distance r from the pumped well (Fig. 1)
- for each data point at time t, we calculate the drawdown in water level s = h0 - h.
For most conventional groundwater wells, there are normally two types of test that we
perform:
 Short term step-testing. This normally comprises a sequence of four or five short 100
- 120 minute tests at increasing pumping rates Q1….Q5 (Fig. 2)
 Constant rate testing. A longer pumping test, at a constant rate, representative of
operational conditions, for a duration typically of 24 to 72 hours (although it can be
longer).

Pumping rate Q

Rest water level Pumping well

Drawdown (s)
Depressed water level in observation well
in aquifer
Drawdown s w in
pumped well
Observation well

Pump

Figure 1. Schematic set-up for a hydraulic pumping test

VI. 1. Step testing

This normally comprises a sequence of four or five short 100 - 120 minute tests at increasing
pumping rates Q1….Q5 (Fig. 2). Its objective is to provide a measure of the well‟s hydraulic
efficiency and to indicate the maximum yield of the well.

At the end of the test, we will have four or five data points - i.e. four or five values of pumping
rate Q and the corresponding value of drawdown in the pumping well (sw). We can plot these
on a diagram of Q versus sw (Fig. 3). This type of diagram allows us, at one glance, to relate
a given yield to a given drawdown, and thus to a given pumping head and energetic
efficiency.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 78 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

Pumping Q4
rate L/s Q3
Q2
Q1

Rest water level

s1
s2
s3

s4
Groundwater level
(m bgl)

Figure 2. A schematic diagram showing the process of step-testing. The duration of each
“step” of the test is typically 100 to 120 minutes. Drawdown is measured in the pumping well

Q (L/s) sw (m)
14.7 1.43
31.5 3.46
Yield (Q)

44.4 5.41 Q3
57.6 8.90

s3

Drawdown (sw)
Figure 3. Plotting the yield and drawdown coordinates on a Yield/Drawdown diagram (note
that sw refers to drawdown in the pumped well)

Rather simplified well performance theory states that:

2
(1) sw = BQ + CQ

where: B and C are constants, corresponding to the aquifer‟s hydraulic resistance (B) and the
well‟s hydraulic resistance (C), respectively. For an ideal well, sw = BQ and we should see a
straight line relating sw and Q on Figure 3. Real wells always give a somewhat upwardly
convex curve and from this convexity, we can estimate how efficiently the well is performing.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 79 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

VI. 2. Constant rate testing

Here, we tend to plot the drawdown (s) against the elapsed time (t) since the start of the test.
The drawdown evolves quickly at first and then ever slower with increasing time. If we plot s
against t on log:log paper, we obtain a curve similar to that shown in Figure 4.
The curve in Figure 4 should fit an idealized equation, called the Theis equation:

Q  r 2S 
s W 
4T  4Tt 
(2)

where: T = transmissivity, S = groundwater storage and W(u) is a complex polynomial

expansion, called the well-function.

Constant rate pumping test

100

10

1
s (m)

0.1

0.01
Figure 4. Typical curve from a

0.001 constant rate pumping test,

plotted on log:log paper.
0.0001 Modified after Misstear et al.
0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 (2006)
t (hr)

By comparing the shape of the curve in Figure 4 to the idealized Theis curve, we can derive a
value of transmissivity. Transmissivity is simply the hydraulic conductivity integrated over a
finite aquifer thickness. Thus, if an aquifer consists of n layers, each of hydraulic conductivity
Kn and thickness Dn, the transmissivity is:
n
(3) T   K n Dn
1

Alternatively, if we just consider data at large t and/or relatively small r, we can use the so-
called Cooper-Jacob equation, which is an approximation to the Theis equation:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 80 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

Q   4Tt  
(4) s ln 2   0.5772
4T   r S  

This predicts that drawdown (s) is approximately proportional to ln(t). Thus, on a plot of s
versus log(t), the slope of the data trend will be inversely related to T (Fig. 5). The intercept of
the line will give us a value of S.
If we measure the drawdown in the pumping well (i.e. sw), we can normally derive a
reasonable value of T. However, if we wish to have a reliable value of groundwater storage S,
we normally need to measure drawdown (s) in an observation borehole (Fig. 1).

Cooper-Jacob Analysis

y = 0.6792Ln(x) + 2.5171
6

5
Drawdown (s) m

2 Figure 5. Typical curve

from a constant rate
1
pumping test, plotted on
0 log:linear paper.
0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 Modified after Misstear
Time (t) hrs et al. (2006)

VII. THERMAL RESPONSE TESTING

In a thermal response test:

- we measure the “far-field” initial average ground temperature (T 0) in an aestifer
(temperature is a measure of thermal potential energy. Aestifer - a geological unit that
stores and transports heat in economically exploitable quantities. From the Latin
aestus = summer / heat, ferre = to bear / carry)
- we then start to inject (or extract) heat from a closed loop GSHP borehole in the
aestifer at a constant rate (q) per drilled metre. In other words, we stress the aestifer
- we measure the aestifer‟s response to stress by measuring the average circulating
carrier fluid temperature (T) at given times (t)
- for each data point at time t, we calculate the thermal displacement in carrier fluid
temperature ΔT = Tb - T0.

In most thermal response test rigs, the source of heat is one or more electric resistance
heaters, whose output is known (power = current x voltage), although gas burners are used

GEOTRAINET GSHP 81 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

as an alternative in some rigs to avoid dependence on an electricity supply. (If we carry out a
heat extraction test, we would typically use a heat pump). The set-up of most test rigs is as
shown in Figure 6.
Flowmeter

F
DATA LOGGER
Tup, Tdown, F Gas/ electric
Voltage V HEATER Pump
Current I

Tdown Tup Temp. sensors

Power to ground

=VxI

= F x VHCwat x (Tdown - Tup)

Figure 6. Schematic thermal response test set-up

The temperature of the circulating carrier fluid (usually water) is logged as it enters (Tdown) and
exits (Tup) the subsurface closed loop. The flow of carrier fluid (F) is logged, usually via an in-
line flowmeter. The heat power transmitted to the ground can be calculated either from the
applied voltage x current to the heaters (plus an additional small amount of heat released by
the circulation pump) or by:

(5) Power = (Tdown - Tup) x VHCwat x F

where: VHCwat is the volumetric heat capacity of the carrier fluid = c. 4.19 kJ/L/K - if it is water.
The average carrier fluid temperature (Tb) is calculated by:

(6) Tb = (Tdown + Tup)/2

VII. 1. International guidelines

There is a broad international consensus regarding standard procedure. IGSHPA (2007) has
published a set of standards, which broadly reflect the recommendations of The American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 2002, 2007). The

GEOTRAINET GSHP 82 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

main points of these are summarized below (but the reader is referred to the original
documents for the full versions):
 Test durations of 36 to 48 hours are recommended
 Standard deviation in applied power should be <1.5% of average power and
spikes should be <10% of average power
 Heat rates of 50 to 80 W per drilled metre should be applied
 A minimum of 5 days shall elapse between loop completion / grouting and test
start-up
 An initial measurement of undisturbed ground temperature measurement
should be made at the end of the equilibration period either by:
- direct insertion of a probe inside the closed loop heat exchanger at various
depths, or
- measurement of fluid return temperature from loop on commencement of
test
 Carrier fluid flow rates that result in a 3 to 7° C differential between flow and
return temperatures are recommended
 The rig heater and above ground portions of the loop should be well insulated
to limit heat loss to less than 2% of total heat input at the minimum outdoor
temperature possible during testing
 Borehole diameter should be <6 inches (150 mm) according to IGSHPA (2007)
 If a test needs to be restarted, the loop temperature should be allowed to
naturally return to within 0.5° C of the original undisturbed temperature before
restarting. ASHRAE note that, following a 48 hour test, a re-equilibration period
of 10-12 days is likely to be necessary in higher conductivity formations and 14
days in lower conductivity formations.
Draft Guidelines (Sanner et al., 2005) have also been developed by the working group of
Annex 13 “wells and boreholes” of the Implementing Agreement on Energy Conservation
through Energy Storage of the International Energy Agency (IEA). The salient points of these
are summarized as follows:
 The test should run with a constant thermal load for at least 50 hours
 The rig should be placed as close to the borehole head as possible and all
connecting pipes thermally insulated
 The initial ground temperature should be determined by one of two methods:
- measuring the temperature profile inside the heat exchanger pipes
(without circulation)
- after the circulation pump is started, record the first 10-20 minutes of
pumping through the pipe without applied heat load
 Typical values of applied thermal load during a heat injection test should be
between 30 W/m (low conductivity formation) and 80 W/m (high conductivity

GEOTRAINET GSHP 83 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

formation). (In the case of a heat extraction test, Prof. Javier Urchueguía
suggests 20-50 W per drilled metre)
 Carrier fluid flow rate should be turbulent throughout the test and never
laminar. Carrying out a test with laminar flow will tend to overestimate borehole
thermal resistivity.

Dipped tem perature profile

(artificial exam ple)

Temperature (°C)
9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 Zone of
seasonal
0

10 fluctuation
20

30

40
Depth (m)

50

60

70

80

90

100

Figure 7. Example of “dipped” temperatures in a closed loop GSHP borehole. Note the
“seasonal fluctuation” in the top, say, 10 m of borehole. The average temperature T 0 is
calculated at 11.7° C

VII. 2. Measurement of initial temperature

As will be seen from the above, it is important to measure the initial average temperature of
the ground (T0) along the length of the closed loop borehole. This can be achieved either by
“dipping” the borehole with a thermocouple on a graduated tape, and taking an average of the
readings at every, say, 2 m (Fig. 7).
Alternatively, carrier fluid can be circulated throughout the loop (without any heat input). The
temperature of the return fluid can be observed over the duration of one fluid cycle through
the loop (Fig. 8). The average return fluid temperature over this duration will approximate to
T0.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 84 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

Fluid temperatures before heaters switched on

12.4

12.2

Flow temperature
Fluid temperature (°C)

12

11.8
Return temperature
11.6

11.4

11.2

11
-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0
Time before test start (min)

Figure 8. Example of fluid temperatures in pre-test phase where carrier fluid is circulating
before heater switch-on; the average return fluid temperature in the initial 8 minutes is 11.7°C
(Note that the flow temperature is slightly warmer than the return temperature, due to a small
heat input from the circulation pump itself)

VII. 3. The heating test

After the heaters are switched on at time t = 0, the mean fluid temperature evolves quickly at
first and then ever slower with increasing time. If we plot average fluid temperature (Tb)
against t, we obtain a curve similar to that shown in Figure 9. Clearly the thermal response
test can be conceived as being analogous to a constant rate aquifer test; temperature (Tb) is
analogous to drawdown (s) and heat injection rate (q) is analogous to groundwater pumping
rate (Q).
The average fluid temperature in the borehole after heater switch-on (Tb) evolves analogously
to drawdown (s) in a constant rate aquifer test. A simple assumption regarding heat transfer
within the borehole heat exchanger itself (borehole thermal resistance Rb) leads to a
theoretical equation describing how Tb evolves following heater switch-on:

q  rb SVC 
2
Tb  T0  E  qRb
4  4t 
(7)

where:
q = heat input per installed metre of loop (W/m)
λ = thermal conductivity of rock (W/m/K)
SVC = volumetric heat capacity of rock
rb = borehole radius
E(u) = complex polynomial function, which looks suspiciously like the Theis well function
(equation (2))!
Rb = borehole thermal resistance (Km/W)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 85 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

At large values of t (typically t > 10 hours), this equation can be simplified to a logarithmic
expression (which looks suspiciously like the Cooper-Jacob approximation (equation (4))

q   4t  
(8) Tb  T0  ln  0.5772  qRb
4   SVC rb 2  

Theoretical thermal response curve

32 20
Flow temperature
30 18
Mean fluid temperature
Fluid temperature (°C) and Flow rate (L/min)

28 16

26 Return temperature 14

24 12

Power (kW)
Flow rate
22 10

20 8
Power input
18 6

16 4

14 2

12 0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Time (hr)

Figure 9. Typical evolution of fluid temperatures in a thermal response test (idealized curve)

Thus, if we plot the temperature displacement

9) ΔT = Tb - T0
q
against the natural logarithm of time (t), we should get a straight line whose slope is 4
(Fig. 10). Thus, in Figure 10, the slope of the loge plot is 2.3957 (the slope of the log10 plot is
nearer 5.52). If the heating power is 6 kW and the borehole depth is 100m, then q = 60 W/m
and the thermal conductivity is given by:

(10) λ = 60 W/m / (4 x 3.1415 x 2.3957 K) = 1.99 W/m/K

If we assume a value for the volumetric heat capacity of the ground (SVC), which does not
-3 -1
normally vary greatly for saturated strata (typically 2 to 2.5 MJ m K ), then we can also use
the intercept of the graph on the y-axis to calculate a value of the borehole thermal resistance
(Rb) in Km/W (Banks 2008). Sanner et al. (2000) and Mands & Sanner (2001) cite values of
borehole thermal resistance between 0.06 and 0.50 Km/W for thermal response tests in

GEOTRAINET GSHP 86 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

Germany. All except two of the German tests yield values below 0.12 Km/W, however, while
boreholes filled with thermally enhanced grout yield values of 0.06 – 0.08 Km/W.

Theoretical thermal response curve

25 20

18
Fluid temperature diplacement (°C) and Flow

Flow rate (L/min)

20 16

14

15 12
Mean fluid temperature displacement (°C)
rate (L/min)

Power (kW)
10
y = 2.3957Ln(x) - 0.7879

10 8

6
Power (kW)
5 4

0 0
1 10 100 1000 10000
Time (min)

Figure 10. Typical evolution of fluid temperatures in a thermal response test, plotted as
temperature displacement on a log:linear plot (idealized curve)

VII. 4. Alternative methods of analysis

The method of analysis described in VII.3. is termed the “line source method”. It does not
really simulate very realistically the temperature evolution within the backfill of the borehole
itself - it merely treats the borehole as a steady-state thermal resistance. For this reason, we
need long tests to “see” into the rock beyond the borehole wall.
Other methods of analysis are available, of increasing complexity, which treat the borehole in
a more sophisticated manner. The cylinder source method, for example, treats the borehole
as a finite cylinder rather than a “line” of negligible radius. If we have time and money to burn,
or if we wish to assess other parameters (such as volumetric heat capacity) in a more detailed
way, we can use numerical models to simulate the thermal response test.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 87 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

The method described above requires that the heat input to the borehole is constant. This
can, occasionally, be a little tricky to maintain - perhaps due to unforeseen wobbles in a
generator‟s output or due to loss of heat to (or gain from) the atmosphere through header
pipes between the rig and the borehole top (although these header pipes should be insulated
with reflective insulation to minimize this effect). If we have a set of test data which does not
have a constant power input, there are ways around this. We can simulate the varying heat
input by superimposed step functions, each step obeying an equation of the form of (7) or (8).
Or we can use some form of parameter-fitting model of the type developed by Shonder &
Beck (2000) and applied in their freely available GPM (Geothermal Properties Measurements)
code. Other dynamic simulation models that can be used for parameter-fitting include
TRNSYS, EPlus and 3D-CFD.

VII. 5. Recovery test

At the end of our heating test, the heaters will be switched off and fluid temperatures will
return back towards the initial ground temperature in a shape which almost exactly mirrors the
heating curve (Fig. 11). It only “almost exactly” mirrors the heating curve because, in the
recovery phase, there will still be a small input of heat (maybe 100-300 W) from the circulation
pump / frictional fluid losses in the pipe. Thus, the curve never quite returns to its starting
point. However, the recovery curve can be analysed, if the input from the circulation pumps is
approximately known to yield a “backup” set of values of λ and Rb.

Theoretical thermal response curve

32 20
Flow temperature
30 18
Mean fluid temperature
28 16
Fluid temperature (°C) and

Return temperature
26 14
Flow rate (L/min)

24 12
Power (kW)

Flow rate
22 10
20 8
Power input from heaters
18 6
16 4
14 2
Power input from circulation pump
12 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Time (hr)

Figure 11. Theoretical curves for fluid temperature evolution during a thermal response test
and subsequent thermal recovery test

VII. 6. Uncertainty in results from a thermal response test

The results from a thermal response test must be cited with an associated indication of
uncertainty (or, as consultants like to call it, confidence !). Thus, we might say that:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 88 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

λ = 2.0 ± 0.2 W/m/K

Note that the level of confidence cited in the results of line-source analysis of thermal
response tests typically reaches around 10% (Gehlin, 2002; Signorelli et al., 2007).
Zervantonakis & Reuss (2006) cite typical levels of confidence of 9% in λ, and 14% in Rb.
Finally, note that the output from a thermal response test is, strictly speaking, the thermal
transmissivity of the geological sequence penetrated. Thermal transmissivity is simply the
thermal conductivity integrated over a finite aestifer thickness. Thus, if GSHP closed loop
borehole penetrates a rock sequence comprising of n layers, each of thermal conductivity λn
and thickness Dn, the thermal transmissivity is:
n
(11) Tth   n Dn
1

Strictly speaking, the slope of a log-linear thermal response test plot of the type in Figure 9 is
equal to:
q Q Q
(12) Gradient  
4 4H 4Tth

where: Q = total heat power input and H = borehole depth. The value of thermal conductivity
(λ) we derive from the test is really only the average thermal conductivity of the geological
sequence - in other words, Tth/H. This may be important if the geological sequence comprises
a number of layers of differing thermal conductivity.

VIII. COST VERSUS BENEFIT FOR SITE INVESTIGATION

A desk study should always be performed before installing a GSHP system. The cost of such
a desk study in time and effort is usually low (probably only several hundred € for domestic
schemes), but the potential risks involved if you neglect the desk study are huge.

For example, you may find yourself in a situation where you do not know what geological and
hydrogeological conditions to expect when drilling a borehole. Drilling through 60 m of boulder
clay before reaching granite can add thousands of € to your drillers‟ invoice, if you were only
expecting 6 m of clay before reaching bedrock. Likewise, penetrating unexpected flooded
mine workings at 50 m depth may require costly strings of permanent casing. Encountering a
strongly artesian (overflowing) aquifer can take a large amount of time and effort to bring
under control, and may lead to prosecution by regulatory bodies.
More seriously, drilling through anthrax-contaminated ground leads to serious health risks for
drillers. A coal mine filled with methane or a high pressure gas pipeline could lead to an
exciting explosion sufficient to destroy several houses. Drilling through a fibre optic cable
could land you with a repair bill in excess of € 1 million. A desk study is well worth the effort.
Likewise, early liaison with regulatory authorities should lead to a cooperative approach to
problem-solving, permitting and licensing, rather than a confrontational one. Don‟t forget that

GEOTRAINET GSHP 89 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

most environmental regulators should, in principle, be eager to see a carbon-saving GSHP

scheme up-and-running: they should not want to hinder you at every turn. Remember that a
good relationship with an environmental regulator can be worth its weight in gold – they often
have valuable geological information and can even be a source of free advice and
consultancy.
Money invested in penetrative site investigation can be a little more difficult to justify,
especially if the GSHP scheme is small and/or the geology and ground conditions at the site
are well constrained by a desk study. But let us take an example: let us imagine that we are
designing a ground source heating scheme in a limestone area. Scientific literature tells us
that the thermal conductivity is around 2.9 ± 0.5 W/m/K. In the worst case, therefore, the
thermal conductivity could be 2.4 W/m/K (and in the best case 3.4 W/m/K). If we design our
scheme on the basis of the 2.9 W/m/K figure we may find that we require 8 boreholes to 100
m. If we are responsible designers, however, we may choose to incorporate a factor of safety
and use the worst conceivable value of 2.4 W/m/K, leading to a recommendation for 10
boreholes to 100 m (1000 m total).
Now let‟s say that we perform a thermal response test and the result comes out as 3.1 ± 0.3
W/m/K. We have received a payback from our investment in the test: our margin of
uncertainty is much reduced. Our worst case thermal conductivity is now 2.8 W/m/K and we
might be able to recommend an array of 8 boreholes to 105 m (total 840 m ). We have saved
160 m drilling – a potential cost saving of maybe € 6400, set against the cost of the TRT,
which was maybe € 5000.
The point at which a thermal response test becomes worthwhile is thus governed by the
relative costs of drilling additional borehole metres and of the test itself. As a general rule of
thumb, it often becomes worthwhile doing a thermal response test when we are dealing with
around 800-1000 m of drilling (8-10 bores to 100 m).
Remember, of course, that our thermal response test may have given a value of 2.2 ± 0.2
W/m/K ! If we had used our original “worst” guess of 2.4 W/m/K we may have ended up with
an under-dimensioned array. Our thermal response test has saved us from that ignominious
fate !

VIII. CONCLUSIONS

Time and effort expended in carrying out a through desk study of ground conditions (buried
services, contamination risk, mining history, geology, hydrogeology and thermogeology) prior
to commencing the design and installation phase of a GSHP scheme is always well-invested.
Likewise, a clear understanding of the regulatory framework and the necessary licenses and
permits will enable an early approach to be made to the regulator, with a view to solving
potentially contentious issues at an early stage and licensing the scheme in a timely manner.
With increasingly large GSHP schemes, the investment in penetrative site investigation
becomes increasingly attractive, in order to more tightly constrain the subsurface
hydrogeological and thermogeological conditions.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 90 Manual for Designers

 SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND
CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

IX. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography

ASHRAE 2002. Methods for determining soil and rock formation thermal properties from field
tests. ASHRAE Research Summary – ASHRAE 1118-TRP. American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
ASHRAE 2007. ASHRAE Handbook on HVAC Applications. Chapter 32. American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
Banks, D. 2008. An Introduction to Thermogeology: Ground Source Heating and Cooling.
Blackwell, Oxford, 339 pp.
EU Water Framework Directive. 2000. Directive 2000/60/EC of the European Parliament and
of the Council establishing a framework for the Community action in the field of water
policy.
EA 2008. Groundwater Protection: Policy and Practice (GP3) - Part 4 Legislation and Policies.
Environment Agency, Bristol, July 2008.
Ferguson, G., Woodbury, A.D. 2006. Observed thermal pollution and post-development
simulations of low temperature geothermal systems in Winnipeg, Canada. Hydrogeology
Journal 14: 1206-1215.
Fry, V. 2009. Lessons from London: ground source heat pumps in Central London. Quarterly
Journal of Engineering Geology and Hydrogeology, in press.
Gehlin, S. 2002. Thermal response test: Method development and evaluation. Luleå
University of Technology, Doctoral Thesis 2002:39.
Goldscheider, N., Bechtel, T.D. 2009. The housing crisis from underground - damage to a
historic town by geothermal drillings through anhydrite, Staufen, Germany. Hydrogeology
Journal 17: 491-493.
IGSHPA 2007. Closed-loop/Geothermal Heat Pump Systems: Design and Installation
Standards. Revised edition 2007. International Ground Source Heat Pump Association,
Oklahoma State University.
Kruseman, G.P., De Ridder, N.A., with Verweij, J.M. 1990. Analysis and evaluation of
pumping test data, 2nd edn. International Institute for Land Reclamation and
Improvement, Wageningen, Netherlands.
Mands, E., Sanner, B. 2001. In-situ-determination of underground thermal parameters. Proc.
International Geothermal Days Germany 2001, Supplement, S. 45-54, GtV, Geeste.
Misstear, B., Banks, D., Clark, L. 2006. Water wells and boreholes. Wiley, Chichester, UK:
498 pp.
Rybach, L. 2003. Regulatory framework for geothermal in Europe, with special reference to
Germany, France, Hungary, Romania, and Switzerland. United Nations University,
Geothermal Training Programme, International Geothermal Conference IGC2003 Short
Course, September 2003, Reykjavík, Iceland: 43-52.
Sanner, B., Reuss, M., Mands, E., Mueller, J. 2000. Thermal Response Test - Experiences in
Germany. Proc. TERRASTOCK 2000, S. 177-182, Stuttgart.
Sanner, B., Hellström, G., Spitler, J., Gehlin, S. 2005 Thermal response test – current status
and world-wide application. Proceedings World Geothermal Congress 2005, Antalya,
Turkey, 24-29 April 2005. This document includes a draft guideline for thermal
conductivity testing, developed by the working group of Annex 13 “wells and boreholes” of
the Implementing Agreement on Energy Conservation through Energy Storage of the
International Energy Agency (IEA).
Shonder, J.A., Beck, J.V. 2000. A new method to determine the thermal properties of soil
formations from in-situ field tests. Oak Ridge National Laboratory (US) Report ORNL/TM-
2000/97.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 91 Manual for Designers

SECTION C. INTEGRATION WITH THE GROUND

CHAPTER 9 SITE INVESTIGATION

Signorelli, S., Bassetti, S., Pahud, D., Kohl, T. 2007. Numerical evaluation of thermal
response tests. Geothermics 36: 141-166.
VDI 2000. Thermal use of the underground: Fundamentals, approvals, environmental
aspects. Verein Deutscher Ingenieure. Richtlinien VDI 4640, Blatt 1 / Part 1, December
2000, Düsseldorf: 32 pp.
VDI 2001. Thermal use of the underground: Ground source heat pump systems. Verein
Deutscher Ingenieure. Richtlinien VDI 4640, Blatt 2 / Part 2, September 2001, Düsseldorf:
43 pp.
Zervantonakis, I.K., Reuss, M. 2006. Quality requirements of a thermal response test. Proc.
th
10 International Conference on Thermal Energy Storage “Ecostock „06”

Rights to use of this chapter: This chapter was produced by © David Banks (2009) of
Holymoor Consultancy Ltd. for the EU GEOTRAINET programme. David Banks and
Holymoor Consultancy Ltd. reserve unrestricted rights to use this chapter for any purpose, but
rights are freely granted to the University of Newcastle and the GEOTRAINET partnership for
any non-commercial training and educational purpose.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 92 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10

HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY by Javier Urchueguía and Paul Sikora

I. INTRODUCTION

Among the final consumers of energy, the residential sector occupies one of the main
positions. In recent years, the European Union has shown growing interest in making the
energy consumption of buildings more efficient and better for the environment. Heat pumping
technologies are widely used for upgrading natural low-temperature energy from renewable
sources, such as air, water, ground and waste heat, to useful temperatures. They are used for
residential and commercial space and water heating, cooling, refrigeration and in industrial
processes.
The heat pump is a very efficient system. This advantage is enhanced when integrating the
use of renewable energies (solar, thermal) in the processes that use heat pumps applied to
buildings. In Figure 1 we can see the evolution in sales of renewable energy in Europe from
2005 to 2008. From 2007 to 2008 sales have increased by nearly 50%

Figure 1. Sales of renewable energy In Europe, 2005 – 2008

The aim of this chapter is to inform designers about the technology of the heat pump so that
they are able to make a correct choice in the design of a GSHP. The selection phase of a
heat pump must be carried out subsequent to the thermal load analysis phase and after the
internal distribution system is defined.
The designer must understand the differences between a GSHP and a conventional system
of heat pump.
It is very important to be rigorous in choosing the heat pump because that conditions the
design of the geothermal heat exchanger.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 93 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

II. THEORY
II. 1. Definition
It seems natural that heat energy will flow from a hot object to a cold object. Heat Pumps use
work to reverse the “natural” direction of heat energy flow.

A heat pump is a machine or device that moves heat from one location (the 'source') to
another location (the 'sink' or 'heat sink') using mechanical work. A heat pump is subject to the
same limitations from the second law of thermodynamics as any other heat engine and
therefore a maximum efficiency can be calculated from the Carnot cycle.
A European standard for testing and rating heat pump performance, EN 14511 – Part 1,
defines a heat pump as follows:
“[a] heat pump [is an] encased assembly or assemblies designed as a unit to provide delivery
of heat. It includes an electrically operated refrigeration system for heating. It can have means
for cooling, circulating, cleaning, and dehumidifying the air. The cooling is by means of
reversing the refrigeration cycle”.
The advantage of pumping heat is that it takes less electrical energy than it does to convert
electrical energy into heat (as in electric furnaces, baseboards and radiant heaters). In fact, in
mild winter temperatures you can get three times as much heat out of each watt of electricity
as you get from an electric furnace.

II. 2. How a heat pump works

The working fluid, in its gaseous state, is pressurized and circulated through the system by a
compressor (Fig. 2). On the discharge side of the compressor, the now hot and highly
pressurized gas is cooled in a heat exchanger, called a condenser, until it condenses into a
high pressure, moderate temperature liquid.

Figure 2. (a) Carnot and (b) Heat pump scheme

The condensed refrigerant then passes through a pressure-lowering device like an expansion
valve or capillary tube. This device then passes the low pressure, (almost) liquid refrigerant to

GEOTRAINET GSHP 94 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

another heat exchanger, the evaporator, where the refrigerant evaporates into a gas via heat
absorption. The refrigerant then returns to the compressor and the cycle is repeated.

II. 3. Heating and cooling mode

Heating and cooling modes of heat pumps do exactly the same thing. They "pump" the heat
from one location to another (Fig. 3). In cooling mode, it functions just like an air conditioner,
moving heat from the inside of a building to the outside; in heating mode, the refrigerant flow
is reversed so it takes low-temperature heat from the source and mechanically concentrates it
to produce high-temperature heat, which is then delivered to a building.

3a. Heat pump cooling mode

3b. Heat pump heating mode

Figure 3. Schematic diagram of an air-to-air heat pump operation (adapted from ASHRAE)
II. 4. Components of a heat pump
The components of a heat pump are:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 95 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

 The refrigerant - the substance which circulates through the heat pump, alternately
absorbing, transporting, and releasing heat
 The reversing valve - controls the direction of flow of the refrigerant in the heat pump
 The evaporator - a coil (heat exchanger) in which the refrigerant absorbs heat from its
surroundings and boils to become a low-temperature vapour
 The compressor - squeezes the molecules of the refrigerant gas together, increasing
the temperature of the refrigerant
 The condenser - a coil (heat exchanger) in which the refrigerant gives off heat to its
surroundings and becomes a liquid
 The expansion device - releases the pressure created by the compressor.
There are different types of heat exchanger (condenser or evaporator) in a heat pump, the
most common are:
o Shell-and-tube heat exchangers (Fig. 4) are fabricated with round tubes
mounted in cylindrical shells with their axes coaxial with the shell axis. There
are various design considerations to be taken into account such as routing of
fluids (shell or tube), pressure drop, etc.

Figure 4. Tube heat exchanger scheme

o Plate and frame heat exchangers (Fig. 5) are usually built of thin plates. The
plates are either smooth or have some form of corrugation, and they are
either flat or wound in an exchanger. Generally, these exchangers cannot
accommodate very high pressures and temperatures.

Figure 5. Plate and frame heat exchanger

Typical shell and tube heat exchangers use a “bundle” of tubes encased in a shell, in which
heat energy is transferred from hot liquids or gases flowing in through the tubes to liquid or
coolant which flows over and around the tubes within the shell, capturing heat energy and

GEOTRAINET GSHP 96 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

flowing back out. Plate and flat plate heat exchangers work similarly with hot and cold liquid
chambers separated by metal plates.
Among the compressors, we can distinguish three different types used in a heat pump:
 Piston compressors - a positive-displacement compressor (Fig. 6) that uses
pistons driven by a crankshaft to deliver gases at high pressure. The intake gas
enters the suction manifold, then flows into the compression cylinder where it is
compressed by a piston driven in a reciprocating motion via a crankshaft, and is
then discharged
 Screw compressor - a type of gas compressor (Fig. 7) which uses a rotary type
positive displacement mechanism. The rotary-screw compressor uses two
meshed rotating helical rotors within a casing to force the gas into a smaller
space
 Compressor scroll - a compressor (Fig. 8) that has two spiral walls or rotary
components that intermesh with each other and are used to compress a
refrigerant. One of the spiral-shaped components is generally fixed, or stationary,
and the other is driven in an orbiting pattern to perform its function. Scroll
compressors are simpler and more efficient than piston units.

Figure 6. Piston compressor scheme Figure 8. Scroll compressor scheme

Figure 7. Screw compressor scheme

GEOTRAINET GSHP 97 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

III. REFRIGERANTS

A refrigerant is a compound used in a heat cycle that undergoes a phase change from a gas
to a liquid and back. The two main uses of refrigerants are refrigerators/freezers and air
conditioners.
The ideal refrigerant has good thermodynamic properties, is non-corrosive, and safe. The
desired thermodynamic properties are a boiling point somewhat below the target temperature,
a high heat of vaporization, a moderate density in liquid form, a relatively high density in
gaseous form, and a high critical temperature. Since boiling point and gas density are affected
by pressure, refrigerants may be made more suitable for a particular application by choice of
operating pressure. Corrosion properties are a matter of materials compatibility with the
components used for the compressor, piping, evaporator, and condenser. Safety
considerations include toxicity and flammability.
The main refrigerants can be classified into three different groups:
 CFCs - have been used as refrigerants in air conditioners and refrigerators, in aerosol
spray cans, in manufacturing foams as industrial solvents, and as cleaning agents in
the manufacture of electronics. One U.S. chemical industry gave them the trade
name of "Freons," and the term has since become a household word. Chemically,
CFCs are a subset of the more general class of compounds known as halocarbons
(carbon- and halogen-containing compounds). CFCs are halocarbons that contain
only the elements carbon, chlorine, and fluorine. The most common CFCs are small
molecules containing only one or two carbon atoms. CFCs, have the highest Ozone
Depletion Potential (ODP)
 HCFC - refers to the chemical composition of the refrigerant. Hydrochloric-Fluoro-
Carbon indicates that the refrigerant is comprised of Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine,
and Carbon. HCFCs are man-made chemicals used as refrigerants and in producing
foam materials. They are non-flammable gases. Along with other substances, they
act in the upper atmosphere to destroy the ozone layer above the Earth which helps
to protect the Earth's surface from harmful ultraviolet radiation. They also contribute to
global warming. The major releases of HCFCs are as leakage from refrigeration and
air conditioning equipment. There are no natural sources of HCFCs
 Hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs) - a group of compounds containing carbon, fluorine and
hydrogen (unlike HCFCs, which also contain chlorine). They are generally colourless
and odourless gases at environmental temperatures and for the most part chemically
unreactive. HFCs are mainly used as substitutes for CFCs and HCFCs (ozone
depleting substances) that are being phased out under the 1987 Montreal Protocol.
Major usage is as refrigerants in refrigeration and air conditioning equipment and as
propellants in industrial aerosols and newer MDIs (Metered Dose Inhalers, e.g. for
asthma). Minor uses include foam-blowing (e.g. making plastic foams for food
packaging), solvent cleaning and in some fire extinguishing systems.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 98 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

III. 1. Montreal Protocol

Since it was discovered in the 1980s that the most widely used refrigerants (CFCs) were
major causes of ozone depletion, a worldwide phase-out of ozone-depleting refrigerants has
been undertaken. These were being replaced with "ozone-friendly" refrigerants (HCFCs,
HFCs). In 1987, the Montreal Protocol, an international environmental agreement, established
requirements that began the worldwide phase-out of ozone-depleting CFCs
(chlorofluorocarbons).

Phase-out schedule for HCFCs and CFCs for developed countries

Date Control Measure

1 January 1996 CFCs phased out (1) HCFCs frozen

at 1989 levels of HCFC + 2.8% of
1989 consumption of CFCs (base
level)

1 January 2004 HCFCs reduced by 35% below base

levels

1 January 2010 HCFCs reduced by 65%

1 January 2015 HCFCs reduced by 90%

1 January 2020 HCFCs phased out allowing for a

service tail of up to 0.5% until 2030
for existing refrigeration and air-
conditioning equipment

IV. EFFICIENCY

There are various terms that define the efficiency of a heat pump.
All of these terms depend on:
 The efficiency of the heat pump (determined mainly by the quality of its components)
 The temperature of the heated or cooled water/air produced by the heat pump
 The temperature of the incoming brine (water/antifreeze mix) from the ground loop (in
the case of a ground source heat pump) or the outdoor air (in the case of an air
source heat pump).

IV. 1. Classification of terms

The coefficient of performance (COP) is a measure of a heat pump's efficiency. It is
determined by dividing the energy output of the heat pump by the electrical energy needed to

GEOTRAINET GSHP 99 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

run the heat pump, at a specific temperature. The higher the COP, the more efficient the heat
pump. This number is comparable to the steady-state efficiency of oil- and gas-fired furnaces.
The COP for a heat pump in a heating or cooling application, with steady-state operation, is:

where:
-ΔQcool is the amount of heat extracted from a cold reservoir at temperature Tcool
-ΔQhot is the amount of heat delivered to a hot reservoir at temperature Thot
-ΔA is the compressor's dissipated work.

All temperatures are in absolute units.

Seasonal performance factor (SPF). The SPF refers to the performance over an entire
season. The power input and output is cumulated for the season; then the total power output
is divided by the total power input, to give the SPF.

Total power output (KWH)/Total power input (KWH) = SPF.

The SPF is a better method of comparing heat pump performance as this figure will give a
more accurate estimate of running cost over an entire season.

The energy efficiency ratio (EER) measures the steady-state cooling efficiency of a heat
pump. It is determined by dividing the cooling capacity of the heat pump in Btu/h by the
electrical energy input in watts at a specific temperature. The higher the EER, the more
efficient the unit.
EER= COP*3.412

Heat pumps are more effective for heating than for cooling if the temperature difference is
held equal. This is because the compressor's input energy is largely converted to useful heat
when in heating mode, and is discharged along with the moved heat via the condenser. But
for cooling, the condenser is normally outdoors, and the compressor's dissipated work is
rejected rather than put to a useful purpose.

V. TYPES OF HEAT PUMPS

Heat Pump systems are available in an array of types and combinations that can suit almost
any application.
For heating purposes, they can be divided into basic types, determined by the source and the
destination of the heat and the medium that the heat pump uses to either absorb or reject the
heat in each of these locations.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 100 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

At either of the heat exchangers, the heat transfer media can be either liquid (water, or often a
glycol mixture) or Air; sometimes it is a combination of the two. In describing the type of heat
pump, generally the heat source is provided first, followed by the destination or heat sink.
The main variants in common use are:
 Air to Air
 Water to Water
 Water to Air
 Air to Water
 Ground to Water
 Ground to Air

V. 1. Air to air
Air to Air systems use the heat energy contained in the outside air and its vapour as a source
of free heat. This heat is then delivered directly by fan-assisted units to the air in the indoor
space.
These heat pumps are good choices for areas with milder climates. They do not work
adequately in extreme temperatures. In cases when the temperature is extremely cold the
heat pump has an auxiliary heat strip that will power on. This strip will produce much more
heat than the heat pump alone, but also costs significantly more to operate.
Another type of air source system is the exhaust air heat pump. This unit uses as its thermal
source the stream of air being vented (exhausted) from the building. Because the source air is
generally at the temperature of the house interior, it will not suffer the same performance
reduction as an external air source heat pump. It is essential to point out that the exhaust air
heat pump is normally only a supplement to another heating system since its source heat has
had to come from elsewhere. If the house is unheated the exhaust air heat pump must use
essentially ambient temperature air. Moreover the volume flux of source air is limited to the air
change rate of the dwelling it serves.
Single-split systems comprise two pieces of equipment located indoors and outdoors
respectively, joined by pipe-work and electrical connections. Multi-split systems have a similar
configuration of one main outdoor unit but with two or more indoor units serving different
locations in the building. In many cases these are capable of independent control of their own
space.

V. 2. Water to water
Water to Water systems operate in the same way as Air to Air systems except that the heat
source is water, generally ground water, river or pond water, or even waste heat from factory
processes. The heat is then delivered to either radiators or fan-coil units within the indoor
space. In the case of river or lake water, the source liquid is seldom circulated, due to fouling
of pipes, etc. Approvals are needed for this type of installation and restrictions exist on the
type of anti-freeze solution used. Water to Water systems can be configured as heating only
or they are available as Heating/Cooling reversible systems.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 101 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

V. 3. Water to air
The heat source is as described in the Water to Water system; the heat is rejected to the air in
the indoor space. Systems are available in a similar range of sizes.
Similar load flexibility, giving simultaneous heating/cooling, can be obtained using a warm
water loop arrangement, known as a water source energy transfer system. The building is
equipped with a ring main water flow and return pipe to each room through which warm water
is circulated by a central pump.
Each room in turn is equipped with a small self-contained reversible heat pump unit. The two
heat exchangers in the heat pump are a combination of water and air source. Room air is
passed through one, water from the ring main through the other, while the heat pump
compressor circulates refrigerant through the internal pipes in the heat exchangers.
A room requiring heat draws its heat source from the warm water. If cooling is required, the
heat absorbed is rejected into the water circuit.
To operate efficiently, the system requires the building's heating/cooling load to remain in
equilibrium for much of the time in operation. Where the water loop temperature exceeds the
operating limits during a heavy cooling demand, excess heat can be rejected to the outside air
through a cooling tower or dry cooler. Conversely, if extra heat is needed, a small boiler is
attached to the loop to raise its temperature. In optimum working conditions, the building
demand is at equilibrium and it is self-sufficient in heat and both the cooling tower and the
boiler remain at standby.

V. 4. Air to water
Heat is absorbed from the outside air and delivered to a water based indoor system of
radiators or fan coils. Heat can also be absorbed from exhaust air by this type of heat pump.
This can be a means of recovering some of the heat otherwise lost from the dwelling.
Blending exhaust air with ambient air will increase the source air temperature. Care must be
taken to ensure that the more humid exhaust air does not aggravate the tendency for the
evaporator to build frost.

V. 5. Ground source systems

Heat energy is extracted from the ground using closed pipe loops buried horizontally in
trenches or in vertical boreholes that are connected back to the GSHP. The fluid circulating in
the closed loop will normally be a water/propylene glycol or acceptable equivalent antifreeze
mixture. However, some direct-acting GSHPs will use refrigerant in the closed loops. Open
loops may also be used to collect water from an aquifer and discharge via a separate aquifer
downstream of the water table flow. However, permits are normally required from the
Environment Agency.
Heat may also be extracted from surface water bodies: streams, ponds, lakes or the sea.
Such systems are normally referred to as hydrothermal. Designs of any such systems must
take careful account of water quality and water temperature and will often require permits
from the appropriate Environment Agency.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 102 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

Heat is introduced to the dwelling and distributed either to a water heating system (ground to
water HPs) or to an air distribution system (ground to air HPs).

VI. COP VARIATIONS

The COP increases as the temperature difference decreases between heat source and
destination. The COP can be maximized at design depending on the system chosen. In
heating mode, by selecting a system requiring low temperature and a heat source with a high
temperature we can increase the COP. In cooling mode, selecting a system requiring high
temperature and a heat source with a low temperature we can increase the COP.
The COP drops as the temperature difference increases between the source and destination.
In winter, air heat pump COP obtained is low, due to low outside air temperature (-5 ºC) which
increases the thermal difference with the destination.
The COP can increase too if we have requirement for heating and cooling at the same time. A
system that can perform cooling in one part and reject the heat absorbed in the process into
another part. In these cases the COP for the heat pump is:

where:
o ΔQcool is the amount of heat extracted from a cold reservoir at temperature
Tcool
o ΔQhot is the amount of heat delivered to a hot reservoir at temperature Thot
o ΔA is the compressor's dissipated work.
In order to make it possible to compare the performance of different heat pumps,
manufacturers normally publish COP figures at standard temperatures for the heated water
and the brine/air. For ground source heat pumps, the COP figures are normally given at
evaporator temperature (brine temperature) of 0 ºC and at heated water temperatures of
35 ºC (a typical temperature for a well-designed underfloor heating system), 45 ºC (a typical
temperature for heating with radiators) and 60 ºC (a typical temperature for hot tap water
production). For air source heat pumps, the COP ratings are normally produced at the same
temperatures for the heated water and at 7 ºC outdoor temperature.
The COP of heat pumps should be established under a well-defined norm. The current
European norm is called EN1461. This norm will supercede the old norm EN255. Many
manufacturers still give their COP ratings under the old norm which sometimes leads to
confusion. The new norm is more conservative since it takes into account not only the
electricity consumption of the compressor but also that consumed by the circulation pumps.
Due to the more conservative definitions, the COP of the same heat pump can be up to one
unit lower under the new norm, compared to the rating under the old norm. The design of the

GEOTRAINET GSHP 103 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

Variation COP
4,5

3,5
COP

3
COP

2,5

2
-10 -5 0 5 10 15 20
Source temperature

Figure 9. Variation COP

central heating system has a strong impact on the COP; the lower the flow temperature, the
higher the COP. The highest COPs for heating are therefore obtained in well-insulated
properties with carefully designed underfloor heating.
For ground source heat pumps, the design of the collector system also impacts on the COP.
A more generous size of collector will result in higher average temperatures of the incoming
brine and therefore a higher COP.

Variation COP
5

4,5

4
COP

3,5

2,5

2
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Heated Water temperature

Figure 10. Variation COP

GEOTRAINET GSHP 104 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

The graph (Fig. 9) shows the variation of the COP versus the heat source temperature
producing a heat water temperature of 45 ºC (fancoils units). To get a COP of 4, it is
necessary to get a source temperature of 15 ºC (ground source). We can see if the source
temperature decreases to 0 ºC the COP is 2.5 ºC (air temperature in winter).
The graph (Fig. 10) shows the variation of the COP versus the heat water temperature
produced with an evaporator temperature of 0º C. To get a COP of 4, it is necessary to keep
the heated water down to 35° C. This is only possible with a good underfloor heating system.
If radiators are used, then they must be oversized to keep the temperature down as far as
possible. If you want to produce heated water at 60º C the COP decreases to 2.5.

VII. RENEWABLE HEAT PUMPS

The “DIRECTIVE 2009/28/EC defines minimum efficiency standards and measurement of

renewable output for heat pumps.

The amount of aerothermal, geothermal or hydrothermal energy captured by heat pumps to

be considered energy from renewable source for the purposes of this Directive, Eres, shall be
calculated in accordance with the following formula:

Eres=Qusable*(1-1/SPF)

where:
o Qusable = the estimated total usable heat delivered by heat pumps fulfilling the
criteria referred to in Article 5(4), implemented as follows: Only heat pumps
for with SPF > 1.15*1/η shall be taken into account
o SPF = the estimated average seasonal performance factor for those heat
pumps
o η is the ratio between total gross production of electricity and the primary
energy consumption for electricity production and shall be calculated as an
EU average based on Eurostat data.
By 1 January 2013, the Commission will establish guidelines on how Member States are to
estimate the values of Qusable and SPF for the different heat pump technologies and
applications, taking into account differences in climatic conditions, especially very cold
climates.

VIII. CONCLUSIONS

The heat pump is the heart of a GSHP. The main ideas that a designer must know to make a
good choice of a heat pump are:
 To know the thermodynamic processes in which are based the heat pump and
the different components (condenser, evaporator, refrigerants, reversing valve)
 To know how a heat pump works, specially the variation of the COP versus the
temperature condenser and evaporator condenser

GEOTRAINET GSHP 105 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 10 HEAT PUMP TECHNOLOGY

 The designer must learn the difference between a conventional heat pump and a
ground source heat pump and its advantages.
The designer must perform the implementation of this phase carefully because it affects the
rest of the design of GSHP.

IX. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography

ASHRAE Handbook. 2004. The Systems and Equipment volume. American Society of
Heating, Refridgeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers Inc., Atlanta, GA.

Outlook. 2009. European Heat Pump Statistic Summary. EHPA (European heat pump
association).

European Heat Pump Action Plan. EHPA 2008. European Heat Pump Association.
https://www.ehpa.org/script/tool/forg/doc496/EHPA%20action%20plan.pdf
Howell and Buckius, 1987. Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics. McGraw-Hill,
New York.

The “DIRECTIVE 2009/28/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL”

of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources and amending
and subsequently repealing Directives 2001/77/EC and 2003/30/EC.

Heating and cooling with a heat pump. 2009. Natural Resources Canada, Office of Energy
Efficiency.http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/home/Heating_and_Cooling_with
_a_Heat_Pump_Section4.cfm

Websites
http://www.ehpa.org/
http://www.heatpumpcentre.org
http://www.energysavers.gov
http://www.uniseo.org/heatpump.html
http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu
http://www.energy.eu/directives/pro-re.pdf

GEOTRAINET GSHP 106 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 11

ENERGY LOAD by Javier Urchueguía and Paul Sikora

I. INTRODUCTION
There are several parameters that are of importance in the design and development of an
optimized ground coupled heat exchanger (GCHE):
 The climatic conditions
 The building type and its energy demand profile
 Geological conditions and the thermal parameters of the subsurface
 Borehole/trench construction, borehole/trench backfilling
 Hydraulic properties, heat-exchanger type and dimensions (resistance to heat
transfer, pressure loss and pumping power) and medium properties
 Geo-hydrology, influence on vertical and horizontal systems (seasonally changing
underground water levels, partial saturation zones, etc.).

In this paper we focus on the analysis of the building energy demand profile and on the
detailed thermal load calculations of cooling and heating, which will be necessary in future
tasks within the project and for the general ground coupled heat exchanger (GCHE) design.
Both represent basic aspects in the conception and final dimensioning of a system based on
GCHE, as they affect the basic energy balance between the soil surrounding the GCHE and
the installation.
When designing a GCHE installation we must take into account both the peak power and the
energy demand, because it is only when the heat pump is in operation that the ground heat
exchanger will transfer or absorb heat. Because the heat pump is dimensioned for the worst
operating conditions, when the thermal load of the building is less than the power of the heat
pump, this will work intermittently. This issue affects the soil thermal resistance, since for its
calculation we have to know the total amount of heat that is injected or extracted during a
whole season.
As a general idea, the design of all thermal installations should be based on the knowledge of
various factors, such as: the indoor conditions to be obtained, the influence of the outdoor
conditions, and the criteria and rules which allow achieving the welfare, security and rational
use of the energy within the building.
Every building has different comfort levels, end uses, design characteristics, etc. Therefore,
by following regulations and indications given by the responsible authorities, a pattern of
comfort and specification design can be pursued. Besides, outdoor conditions, such as dry
bulb/wet bulb temperature, relative humidity, solar radiation, etc., are necessary to establish

GEOTRAINET GSHP 107 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

the maximum instantaneous thermal energy demand, in order to scale up all the equipment
and the systems of the building.
Once the design conditions are fixed (i.e. indoor and outdoor conditions, thermal insulation of
the building, etc.) in order to determine all thermal loads on every heating and cooling system,
the following design factors will also be taken into account:
 Facade construction and orientation characteristics
 Solar factor and glazed surface protection
 Influence of surrounding building
 Hourly working of subsystems
 Heating thermal gains
 Ventilation and removal index
All calculations will be performed individually for each local part of the building, so the
maximum and minimum load can be obtained. Hence, the heating and cooling power to be
supplied by the heat pump system should be fixed to the sum of all thermal loads obtained
before, taking into account the heat losses through the distribution network. On the other
hand, dynamic simulations are needed in order to calculate the energy demand profile of the
building.

II. THEORETICAL FUNDAMENTALS

Knowledge of this area is essential for designers. Depending on their basic training (engineer,
geologist, etc.), the development issues can be more or less complex.

II. 1. Gains and loads

The thermal load is defined as the amount of heat to be drawn out or supplied to the building
in order to maintain the temperature and humidity constant and equal to a preset value.
The thermal load calculation process has two stages:
- Heat gains calculation. The heat gains represent the instantaneous heat flow (positive
or negative) from the outside (ambient or adjacent rooms) to the inside
- Thermal load calculation.

Figure 1. Dynamic interacting

subsystems in a building context

GEOTRAINET GSHP 108 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

We can divide the heat flow into two groups (Fig. 1):
 External gains
- Heat gain from the incoming radiation from windows and skylights
- Heat gain by conduction through walls, ceilings, windows in contact with the
outside
- Heat gain by conduction through walls, ceilings, etc,, in contact with a
different temperature environment
- Heat gain by conduction through walls, floors in contact with the ground
Infiltration gains (air flow from outside only).
 Internal gains
- Heat gain due to people
- Heat gain due to artificial lighting
- Heat gain due to equipment.
As well as these, we must consider the ventilation gains (air flow from a user-defined source
like a HVAC system).
Each heat gain has two fractions: a convective fraction and a radiation fraction (Figs 2 & 3).
The first directly affects the internal space as long as the second is absorbed and stored by
the perimeter walls, and is delivered later to the internal space by air convection. Thus, the
convective fraction of the heat gain turns to thermal load instantaneously and the radiation
fraction of the heat gain is damped and lagged before being considered as thermal load. In
order to obtain the thermal load from the radiation fraction of the heat gain, the method of
transfer function or response factors is used.

Figure 2. Relationship between heat gains and loads

The method of the transfer function or response factors can be described as the method of
the thermal history of the wall. The wall is considered as a black box and depending on its
components (layers, materials, etc.) it has a different thermal behaviour. Basically, we may

GEOTRAINET GSHP 109 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

consider heavy or light walls with low or high thermal mass. A heavy wall is formed by high
density materials with considerable thickness, while the wall thermal mass is characterized by
the materials‟ thermal conductivity and thermal capacity.

Figure 3. Graphic example of load and gain

II. 2. Heat gains calculation

This sub-section describes the mathematical models for calculating the heat gains. The
purpose is a basic understanding of these models that are implemented in different numerical
codes available on the market for calculating heat loads and for simulating the building energy
profile.

II. 2. 1. External walls

Usually the external walls are modelled according to the transfer function relationships of
Mitalas (1971) defined from surface to surface. For any wall, the heat conduction at the inside
surface at a current time n is described as follows:
(1)
Q (n)  ai E(n  i)  biQ(n  i)
i 0 i 1

where:
- a and b are z-transfer function coefficients
- E represents the outside surface temperature.
The number of time steps (n) needed for the calculations shows whether the wall is a heavy
or a light wall with a high or a low thermal mass. If only a few time steps have to be
considered to describe the thermal behaviour of the wall, the expression (1) can be replaced
by a thermal resistance definition neglecting the thermal mass.

II. 2. 2. Internal walls

For the calculation of the heat gains for internal walls (Fig. 4), the hypothesis of low thermal
mass and constant boundary conditions (wall surface temperature) is as follows:

T
Q 
x 1
 i 
1
(2)
h1 n Ki h2

GEOTRAINET GSHP 110 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

where:
2
- h is the convective heat transfer coefficient at surface (W/m K)
- T is the temperature gradient through the wall (K)
- x is the thickness of the layer i (m)
- K is the thermal conductivity of the layer I (W/mK).
The above expression can also be written as (3), where U is the global transfer coefficient:
(3) Q  U  T

Figure 4. Heat transfer in internal walls

For example, in Spain, maximum U values recommended for exterior walls vary according to
the climate of the area (1.2 (warm area) and 0.74 (cold zone)). For internal walls, these values
vary from 1.22 (hot zone) to 1.00 (cold zone)).

II. 2. 3. Heat gains through windows

The heat transmission through glass surfaces is, on the one hand, due to the temperature
gradient between the two glass surfaces that determines a conduction heat transfer, and on
the other hand, due to the incident solar radiation, causing what is known as radiant
transmission (Fig. 5).

absorption

Figure 5. Effects of solar

radiation through
windows reflectance transmittance

GEOTRAINET GSHP 111 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

To calculate the heat transfer by conduction we can use the expression (3) due to the low
heat capacity of glass sheets.
To consider the effect of solar radiation, we define a glass solar factor (SF) as the ratio
between the total energy that enters through the glazing and the solar energy that strikes the
surface outside of the glass.
This energy is the sum of the direct heat transmission and of the absorbed solar energy
fraction transmitted through the window due to convection:

D I D  d I d
SF   D I D   d I d  hi
(4) he  hi
where:
- ,  and  are the transmittance, absorption and reflectance coefficients with values between
0 and 1 according to the properties of the glass
2
- h is the convective heat transfer coefficient at internal or external window surface (W/m K)
2
- ID is the direct solar radiation (W/m )
2
- Id is the diffuse solar radiation (W/m ).

II. 2. 4. Infiltration and ventilation gains

All incoming energy due to infiltration and/or ventilation can be considered purely convective,
so that any heat gain becomes a thermal load immediately. The heat gain (or loss) is obtained
through an energy balance performed on the outside air volume:

. .
(5) Qinf  minf  Cp (Toutside  Tinside)

. .
(6) Qvent  mvent  Cp (Tvent  Tinside)

where:
 (Kg/m ) and Cp (J/KgK) are the air density and the air specific heat capacity.
3

3
For calculating the infiltration heat load, the mass flow rate (m inf) (m /s) is estimated by
3
empirical methods, while the ventilation parameters (mass flow rate, m vent (m /s) and
temperature Tvent) (K) are fixed by national legislation.

II. 2. 5. Internal heat gains

Internal heat gains are those factors whose common feature is that the heat source is inside
the conditioned space: people, artificial lighting and equipment. The instantaneous heat gain
from these sources can be expressed as follows:

(7) Q  n Q 0 f

where:
- For people, Q depends on n (number), Q 0 (degree of activity, clothing factors, etc.), f
(schedule)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 112 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

- For artificial lighting, Q depends on n (number), Q 0 (type of lamp), f (control strategy,

schedule)
- For equipment, Q depends on n (number), Q0 (installed power), f (schedule)
In the calculation of internal gains, one should take into account both the sensible heat and
the latent heat, due to the fact that the moisture balance effect is very important for cooling.

III. PRACTICAL FUNDAMENTALS

III. 1. Methods for thermal loads calculation

III. 1. 1. European standards (Dick van Dijk and Marleen Spiekman)

EN ISO 13790 Thermal performance of buildings - Calculation of energy use for space
heating and cooling. In Europe, the publication from December 2002 of the Energy
Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD, EPBD 2002) was followed by a Mandate to CEN
to develop a set of standards on energy performance in buildings (M343 2004), in order to
support the EU Member States for the national implementation of the EPBD. More information
on the set of CEN standards is given in the so-called CEN "Umbrella Document" (CEN/TR
15615 2007).
In 1995, the European standard EN 832 (EN 832 1995) was developed, containing a
simplified calculation method of the energy use for heating of residential buildings. Its follow
up was the above quoted EN ISO 13790:2003, including also non-residential buildings. As
part of the Mandate 343 to CEN to support the EPBD, the 2004 version of this international
standard has been expanded with the calculation of the energy use for space cooling and
additional features (EN ISO 13790 2007).
In short, the new EN ISO 13790:2008 gives calculation methods for assessment of the annual
energy use for space heating and cooling of a residential or a non-residential building, or a
part of it, referred to as “the building”.
This method includes the calculation of:
 the heat transfer by transmission and ventilation of the building zone when heated or
cooled to constant internal temperature
 the contribution of internal and solar heat gains to the building heat balance
 the annual energy needs for heating and cooling, to maintain the specified set-point
temperatures in the building – latent heat not included
 the annual energy use for heating and cooling of the building, using input from the
relevant system standards referred to in ISO 13790:2008 and specified in Annex A.
ISO 13790:2008 also gives an alternative simple hourly method, using hourly user schedules
(such as temperature set-points, ventilation modes or operation schedules of movable solar
shading).
The procedures are given for the use of more detailed simulation methods, in order to ensure
compatibility and consistency between the application and results of the different types of
method. ISO 13790:2008 provides, for instance, common rules for the boundary conditions
and physical input data irrespective of the calculation approach chosen.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 113 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

ISO 13790:2008 has been developed for buildings that are, or are assumed to be, heated
and/or cooled for the thermal comfort of people, but can be used for other types of building or
other types of use (e.g. industrial, agricultural, swimming pool), as long as appropriate input
data are chosen and the impact of special physical conditions on the accuracy is taken into
consideration.
The calculation procedures in ISO 13790:2008 are restricted to sensible heating and cooling.
The energy use due to humidification is calculated in the relevant standard on the energy
performance of ventilation systems, as specified in Annex A; similarly, the energy use due to
dehumidification is calculated in the relevant standard on the energy performance of space
cooling systems, as specified in Annex A.
ISO 13790:2008 is applicable to buildings at the design stage and to existing buildings. The
input data directly or indirectly called for by ISO 13790:2008 should be available from the
building files or the building itself. If this is not the case, it is explicitly stated at relevant places
in ISO 13790:2008 that it may be decided at national level to allow for other sources of
information. In this case, the user reports on which input data have been used and from which
source. Normally, for the assessment of the energy performance for an energy performance
certificate, a protocol is defined at national or regional level to specify the type of sources of
information and the conditions when they may be applied instead of the full required input.

III. 1. 2. ASHRAE standards

The transfer function method (TFM) is a well known standard recommended by ASHRAE
(American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers). It can be
considered the most used tool currently available for the thermal analysis of a building.
(ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, 2005. Chapter 32, Energy Estimating and Modelling
Methods; ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, 2009. Chapter 18, Non-residential Cooling
and Heating Load Calculation).

III. 1. 3. Degree-day method

Cooling or Heating degree day (CDD, HDD) are quantitative indices designed to reflect the
demand for energy needed to cool or heat a building. These indices are derived from daily
temperature observations, and the heating or cooling requirements for a given structure at a
specific location are considered to be directly proportional to the number of HDD/CDD at that
location.
For instance, the HDD are defined relative to a base temperature - the outside temperature
above which a building needs no heating. The most appropriate base temperature for any
particular building depends on the temperature that the building is heated to, and the nature of
the building (including the heat-generating occupants and equipment within it). For
calculations relating to any particular building, HDD should be selected with the most
appropriate base temperature for that building.
There are a number of ways in which the HDD can be calculated: the more detailed a record
of temperature data, the more accurate the HDD that can be calculated. However, most HDD
are calculated using simple approximation methods that use daily temperature readings

GEOTRAINET GSHP 114 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

instead of more detailed temperature records such as half-hourly readings. One popular
approximation method is to take the average temperature at any given day, and subtract it
from the base temperature. If the value is less than or equal to zero, that day has zero HDD.
But if the value is positive, that number represents the number of HDD on that day.

III. 2. Programs for the simulation of the building energy performance

Despite the large number of building energy modelling programs on the market, most are
unknown to the professional designer or their use is restricted to the calculation of thermal
loads for sizing the air conditioning systems. According to a study of the Czech Technical
University (Fig. 6) the most used modelling programs used by architects and engineers are:
eQuest, Energy10, DOE-2, TRNSYS, VISUALDOE, ECOTECT, ESP-r, EnergyPlus.

Figure 6. Software used in the energy simulation (Altavilla et. al, 2004)

The new Directive 2010/31/EU (Energy Performance Buildings Directive recast), approved on
19 May 2010, foresees the development of a European programme for building energy
simulation.

III. 3. Example
As an example we will show a load profile study for an existing residential area in the city of
Valencia (Spain). The software used for the evaluation of the heating and cooling load profile
is CALENER (2001), a package made to characterize the building energy efficiency in Spain.

III. 3. 1. General description of residential block

The residential block consists of 10 housing blocks; each block has a ground floor with
parking spaces and commercial areas, and three floors of apartments. Each floor counts with
two dwellings having an identical distribution around an internal patio to which three out of
four bedrooms are orientated. A window in the staircase also faces this inner patio.
2
Each dwelling has a surface area of 65.33 m : a kitchen, a living room, a toilet, a bathroom, a
storage place, four bedrooms and a corridor. Moreover, each floor has a corridor of the stair

GEOTRAINET GSHP 115 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

room and an inner patio. The two building facades are oriented to the North and to the South;
on each side there are balconies. The main access to the building is situated on the southern
facade.
Since they have identical functions and orientations, the toilet and bathroom have been
modelled as a single space. The same occurs with bedrooms 3 and 4.
The living room and the four bedrooms are considered as conditioned zones, while the rest of
the rooms and the garage are considered as non-conditioned.
2 2 2
Total (m ) conditioned (m ) Non-conditioned (m )
56.300 25.404 30.896

III. 1. 2. Heating and cooling load profiles

Table 1 shows the heating and cooling demands for each month of the year, distinguished in
the following way:
 For heating: Conduction Walls, Conduction Roofs, Conduction Ground, Infiltrations,
Conduction Windows, Solar Heating through windows, Persons present, Lighting and
Equipment
 For Cooling: Conduction Walls, Conduction Roofs, Conduction Ground, Infiltrations
sensible, Infiltrations Latent, Conduction Windows, Solar Heating through windows,
Persons present sensible, Persons present latent, Lighting and Equipment sensible
and Equipment latent.

For a better understanding of the results shown in the table, the following considerations need
to be made:
First of all, the interior temperature and relative humidity levels established to evaluate the
energy demand are different in heating and in cooling mode. That is why for the same time,
different demands can be found for different temperature and humidity levels. Therefore 20 ºC
can be established as a temperature for heating demand and 24 ºC to evaluate the cooling
demand.
It also needs to be taken into account that during a simulation period (e.g. one month) the
various load fractions might have opposite signs, while it is the sum of these fractions, the
total or net value, which determines the heating demand (in case of a negative value) or the
cooling demand (positive net value). While analysing the heating load during the month of
January, for instance, some fractions with negative values can be found (normally conduction
through walls, roofs, windows and ground, as well as infiltrations) and other fractions with
positive values (usually energy spent in lighting, electrical equipment, energy generated by
people in the building and solar radiation that enters through the windows).
Finally, it is not easy to know in advance whether a building will be in heating or in cooling
regime during a certain time period (except in obvious situations). Therefore the energy
demand for each regime and each time period must be evaluated (although CALENER
evaluates each hour, the results shown only give information on a monthly basis). Afterwards,
the total values (sum of load fractions) of heating and cooling can be compared for each
month in order to predict the regime that will exist.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 116 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

HEATING REGIME (kWh) – RESIDENTIAL BLOCK IN VALENCIA

Component Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Total
Conduction - - -
Walls 18490 12460 -9590 -2400 -870 0 0 0 10 -370 -9720 18340 -72230
Conduction - -
Roofs 10020 -6490 -3810 -380 -360 0 0 0 0 -330 -5580 10220 -37190
Conduction
Ground -1950 -1750 -1860 -1550 -780 -20 0 0 -10 -620 -1690 -1950 -12180
Conduction - -
Windows 11230 -8390 -7180 -3550 -1390 -10 0 0 -10 -1220 -6930 10880 -50790
Solar Radiation
Windows 7750 6870 6350 3270 1120 0 0 0 10 820 5050 7120 38360
Lighting 6060 5040 4720 2830 1270 10 0 0 10 1040 4690 6050 31720
-
- - - - - - 16120
Infiltration 33590 26600 24420 13620 -5560 -50 0 0 -50 -4380 20790 32140 0
Persons 7330 6240 6080 4150 2010 40 0 0 30 1780 6010 7320 40990
Equipment 6060 5050 4720 2830 1270 10 0 0 10 1040 4690 6050 31730
-
- - - - - 19079
Total 48080 32490 24990 -8420 -3290 -20 0 0 0 -2240 24270 46990 0

COOLING REGIME (kWh) – RESIDENTIAL BLOCK IN VALENCIA

Component Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Total
Conduction
Walls -790 -1270 -1410 -1040 4680 13160 21690 22800 16420 4030 -730 -810 76730
Conduction
Roofs -180 -470 -640 640 5180 9020 13010 12230 7670 870 -570 -160 46600
Conduction
Ground 0 -10 -90 -340 -1170 -1870 -1950 -1950 -1880 -1330 -190 0 -10780
Conduction
Windows -280 -440 -680 -1290 0 3100 6800 7080 3980 -190 -420 -290 17370
Solar
Radiation
Windows 3120 5500 10880 15500 19810 21640 23370 22280 19430 15360 6150 2770 165810
Lighting 440 830 1780 3460 5230 6270 6500 6500 6280 5450 1600 450 44790
Infiltration -1370 -2400 -4420 -7410 -6680 80 9410 10760 3620 -4890 -2610 -1270 -7180
Persons 380 730 1630 3300 5700 7420 7710 7710 7430 5930 1450 380 49770
Equipment 440 830 1780 3470 5240 6280 6500 6500 6280 5460 1600 450 44830
Total 1760 3300 8830 16290 37990 65100 93040 93910 69230 30690 6280 1520 427940
Table 1. Heating and cooling demands for each month

Note: It must be emphasized that when cooling loads are found in months of clear winter
conditions the user must be extremely careful interpreting these data for different reasons:
 Firstly, the appearance of net positive values in winter months only means that during
some hours of the month the net balance was positive, hence there was a heat gain
 Secondly, the ratio between hours of heat gain (refrigeration) and hours of heat loss
(heating) determines whether during a certain month the building is in heating regime,
cooling regime or is subject to thermal inversion
 In certain zones of a building, such as interior spaces, refrigeration might be needed
during the whole year since the heat losses are very low and always smaller than the
internal heat gains.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 117 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

Negative values represent heat losses, positive values represent heat gain. For cooling, the
heat losses are a positive effect since it reduces the quantity of energy that needs to be
dissipated by the cooling systems.
Analysis of the data shown in the tables above shows that the fraction that causes the highest
refrigeration load is solar radiation through windows, with a total value of 165.810 kWh per
year. In order to reduce the solar heat gain, a reflecting glass can be installed (which will have
a negative impact on the heating load) or we can use other kinds of protection. The results
also show that the main factors that have an influence on the heating load are infiltration
(-161.200 kWh/year), followed by conduction losses through walls (-72.230 kWh/year) and to
a minor extent through windows and roofs. It is important to remember that this is an example
of heating and cooling load calculations of a real residential block in Valencia (Spain). The

140000

120000

100000

80000

60000
kWh

40000

20000

0
J F M A M J J A S O N D J F M A M J J A S O N D
-20000

-40000

-60000

Heat Loss Heat Gain Heat Net

Figure 7. Total values per month for both cooling and heating in a residential block in Valencia

load profile can vary considerable depending on several factors such as: the building‟s
orientation, the climate, shadows caused by adjacent buildings, materials used in walls, roofs,
doors, windows and floors, occupation, artificial and natural lighting, equipment, variability in
air humidity, infiltrations, ventilation, lighting control, etc.
The graph in Figure 7 shows the predominance of cooling on a yearly basis: during seven
months cooling is required, while only during five months must the heating be switched on.
Moreover, the maximum cooling load is two times higher than the maximum heating load.

III. 4. European areas and aplications

Regional differences in climate, building tradition and user behaviour in Europe will have an
impact on the calculation procedures, the input data and consequently on the energy
performance.
Several standards allow choices between different options to be made at national level. Some
of the standards contain a reference method (often detailed) and allow national annexes with

GEOTRAINET GSHP 118 Manual for Designers

 SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING
CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

(often simplified) national methods. Most standards allow the input data and boundary
conditions to be specified at national level. This is also the case for EN ISO 13790.

IV. ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND ECONOMIC COSTS-BENEFIT ASSESSMENT

The calculation of the building energy demand influences the design of the ground heat
exchanger in the following ways:
- long-term evolution of the soil thermal conditions under the requirements based on
the thermal energy demand (base load), i.e. increased or decreased ground
temperature
- ground behaviour at the peak power required by the installation (peak load), i.e.
analysis of the degradation that can occur in buried pipes due to work at extreme
temperature in the heat pump.
For this reason a correct estimate of the building energy profile is important to a good sized
ground heat exchanger in order to obtain an adequate system performance and this also
affects the investment in building it. Besides the building energy demand, it represents the
principal data needed for the calculation of the installation payback.

V. CONCLUSIONS

As a general conclusion, the two steps necessary for setting up heating and cooling systems
are:
 Thermal load calculations
 Analysis of the energy demand.
Both are a basic aspect in the conception and final dimensioning of a system based on
ground coupled heat exchangers (GCHE), because they affect the ground behaviour and the
system efficiency.
Therefore, in order to determine the thermal load, it is necessary:
- to identify the characteristics of the construction (materials, dimensions, shape and
outside colour), the environmental information (climate data, selecting design
conditions)
- to select the indoor design conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation),
- to select the site characteristics (illumination requirements, occupant activities,
equipment and process involved)
- to select the day and time for which the load is determined, preferable for the
maximum and minimum requirements.
A good tool for these calculations is the EN ISO 13790:2008 that gives a method for the
assessment of the annual energy use for space heating and cooling of a residential or a non-
residential building. More complicated tools to calculate the building energy demand profile
are the dynamic simulations programmes.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 119 Manual for Designers

SECTION D. INTEGRATION WITH THE BUILDING

CHAPTER 11 ENERGY LOAD

VI. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography

Stephenson, D.G., Mitalas, G.P. 1971. Calculation of Heat Conduction Transfer Functions for
Multi-Layer Slabs. ASHRAE Annual Meeting, Washington, D.C., August 22-25, 1971.

Mitalas, G.P., Arseneault, J.G. 1967. FORTRAN IV Program to Calculate z-Transfer

Functions for the Calculation of Transient Heat Transfer Through Walls and Roofs.
Division of National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa.

van Dijk, D., Spiekman, M. 2007. CEN STANDARDS FOR THE EPBD – CALCULATION OF
ENERGY NEEDS FOR HEATING AND COOLING Business unit Building and Systems,
TNO Built Environment and Geosciences, Delft, The Netherlands.
CALENER. 2001. Manual de Usuario Versión 2.0. Grupo de Termotecnia, Escuela Superior
de Ingenieros, Universidad de Sevilla.

Thermal loads standards

EN ISO 13790:2008 Thermal performance of buildings - Calculation of energy use for space
heating and cooling.

ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals 2009.

Building energy simulation programs

www.doe2.com/equest
www.nrel.gov/buildings/energy10
simulationreseacr.lbl.gov
sel.me.isc.edu/trnsys
www.ecotec.com
wwwenergyplus.gov
www.esru.strath.ac.uk/Programs/ESP-r.htm

GEOTRAINET GSHP 120 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 12

DESIGN OF BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS by Burkhard Sanner

I. INTRODUCTION
A borehole heat exchanger (BHE) is meant to carry a fluid inside the underground and allow
for exchange of heat from the underground into the fluid (heat extraction, heating mode of the
system) or for exchange from the fluid into the underground (heat injection, cooling mode of
the system). The BHE consists of pipes containing the fluid; because it needs to be installed
down to a certain depth, it is typically long and slim. The BHE must include a design for the
return of the fluid from the deepest point in the borehole back to the surface.
The different methods of coupling the fluid circuit inside the BHE to the heat pump are shown
in Chapter 1, Figure 3. Because of the need to circulate a fluid down into the earth and up
again, there are only a few basic options for BHEs:

 Coaxial (or concentric) pipes, also known as pipe in pipe

 U-pipes (two or more simple pipes connected at the bottom)

 Only for heat pipes (see Chapter 1, Figure 3). A single pipe is sufficient, as the vapour
can rise upwards in the centre of the pipe while the condensate flows down along the
pipe walls.

Over the course of >60 years of BHE development, various design alternatives have been
developed and tested. Due to cost effectiveness, only a few rather simple designs prevail
(Fig. 1). These BHE are inserted in boreholes, and the remaining annulus between the pipes
and the borehole wall is either filled with a special grouting material (see Chapter 15), or with
water if the borehole is stable (limited to Scandinavia).

Simple coaxial Single-U-pipe Double-U-pipe

25-40 mm

Figure 1. Cross sections of three most frequent BHE types

The effectiveness of BHEs can be described using a summary parameter, the borehole
thermal resistance Rb. This parameter includes all the heat transfer phenomena from the
ground outside the borehole right into the fluid inside the pipes (Fig. 2). For BHE design, only

GEOTRAINET GSHP 121 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 12 DESIGN OF BOREHOLE HEAT EXCHANGERS

these parameters can be influenced by engineering, as the ground outside the borehole
cannot be changed.
The maximum efficiency of a BHE under given load circumstances (i.e. permissible
temperature difference ground-fluid and planned operation time) can be calculated and
plotted against Rb (see Chapter 1, Figure 8). So the quality of a BHE type can be
benchmarked using Rb and the Hellström-efficiency ηH. It depends mainly on pipe material,
pipe size, pipe configuration, and filling of the annulus.

Ground

Agm

Amp
Grouting Material (Rm)
Apf

Pipe Material (Rp)

A: Transfer resistances
B: Material resistances
Rb = Agm + Rm + Amp + Rp + Apf

Figure 2. The components of Rb shown in the cross sections of a double-U-BHE

For sizing of BHEs to a given heating and/or cooling load, different methods are available
both for smaller and larger projects. For smaller systems such as in single-family-houses,
design is done using tables or nomograms (e.g. VDI 4640 or SIA 384/6), or calculations with
easy-to-use software. For larger systems, design calculations with simple software like EED
or even with numerical simulation is required. The boundary between small and large typically
is set at about 30 kW thermal capacity. The procedures are described in Chapter 13.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 122 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 13

BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

(a) SMALL SYSTEMS by Burkhard Sanner

I. INTRODUCTION

For small buildings, the design is normally done by using a specific extraction rate in W/m. For
using this simple design method, certain limits need to be observed (list according to VDI
4640, 2001):

 Valid only for heating (incl. Domestic Hot Water (DHW)), no cooling
 Length of individual BHE not less than 40 m and not exceeding 100 m
 Smallest distance between BHEs 5 m for depth down to 50 m;
6 m for depths exceeding 50 m
 Double-U-pipes or coaxial pipes
 Not applicable to a larger number of small plants in a limited area.

The values given in VDI 4640 can only give a rough estimate and will prevent the design to be
completely out of any meaningful sizing. Compared to calculated values for specific cases,
this rudimentary resolution becomes obvious (Fig. 1). In any case, the VDI values can give an
idea of the range of BHE heat supply possible under Central European conditions. Some
rules of thumb used in the past were much more arbitrary; statistics from BHEs in some
German states show that the vast majority of BHEs for smaller projects are sized for ca.
50 W/m extraction rate!
Einfamilienhaus, 10 kW Wärmebedarf
70
mit with
Grundwasserfluß
groundwater flow
60

50

40
ohne
withoutGrundwasserfluß
groundwater flow
30

20
Daten nach
data after VDI (2001)
VDI 4640 4640
10
2 Erdwärmesonden
calculated for 2 BHE, 10 kW heating capacity
0
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Wärmeleitfähigkeit
Ground [W/m/K]
Thermal Conductivity (W/m/K)

Figure 1. Comparison of specific heat extraction rate after VDI 4640 (2001) and EED software

GEOTRAINET GSHP 123 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

A comparison of the various methods is provided for a single family house and a heat pump
for heating only. The basic assumptions are:

 Maximum building heat load 12 kW

 Average full-load hours of heat pump 1800 h/a (typical for systems without
domestic hot water (DHW))
 Heat distribution system floor heating (slab heating)
 Heat supply temperature max. 35 °C
 Expected average SPF 3,8
 Underground geology Sandstone
 Mean ground surface temperature 9,5 °C

Using the following formulae, the evaporator capacity (which in heating mode is equal to the
heat to be supplied from the ground) can be calculated from heating capacity and SPF:

Pheating
Pground   SPF  1
SPF
 3,8  1  3,16  2,8  8,8
12
Pground 
3,8
where: Pground = heat pump evaporator capacity in W or kW
Pheating = heat pump heating capacity in W or kW
SPF = Seasonal Performance Factor (COP over heating season).

The resulting ground heat supply (evaporator capacity) is 8.8 kW or 8800 W.

As the plant is inside the constraints given in VDI 4640, the specific heat extraction rate can
be used for BHE design (“loop sizing”). The basic formulae are:

Pground  nBHE  lBHE  PBHE

respectively:

p ground
l BHE 
nBHE  PBHE

where: Pground = heat pump evaporator capacity in W

PBHE = specific heat extraction rate in W/m
lBHE = (average) length of one BHE in m
nBHE = number of BHE.

II. VDI 4640

A value for the thermal conductivity of the sandstone on site has to be estimated; the
recommended value for sandstone as to VDI 4640 is used (see table in Chapter 4), which is λ
= 2,3 W/m/K. Then the relevant value for the specific heat extraction rate can be taken from
the table in VDI 4640 (column for 1800 h/a):

GEOTRAINET GSHP 124 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

Method Range Specific heat extraction rate PBHE

General Values 1,5-3,0 W/m/K 60 W/m
Values for specific rock types Sandstone 65-80 W/m

Now the required borehole length can be calculated with the formula given above (the heat
pump evaporator capacity has to be converted from kW to W):
8800
l BHE   73,4 m
From general values 2  60

8800 8800
l BHE   67,7 m l BHE   55,0 m
From specific rock values 2  65 to 2  80

As a result, 2 BHEs of 55.0 m – 73.4 m length would be required – quite a range! The
designer now has to judge from experience to size the design closer to the lower or to the
upper limit of the range, according to the rock type (fractures, weathering) and the presumed
accuracy of the heat load data.

III. SIA 384/6

In SIA 384/6, the design for smaller projects is given in annex D3. Here some curves are
provided for a standard BHE and for various correction factures. The process is shown using
the same example as above.
First, the specific heat extraction rate of a standard 100 m BHE according to SIA 384/6, D3,
figure 7 (pipe diameter 32 mm) is read as: 37 W/m
The same formula as above can be used for calculating required standard BHE length:
8800
l BHE   119 m
2  37
The resulting value of 2 BHEs each 119 m deep (more than twice the smallest sizing
according to VDI 4640!) now has to be adjusted with different correction factors.
As for the standard BHE, an operation time (full-load hours) of 1850 h/a is assumed, a
correction for differing values is required. Figures 11-19 of annex D3 SIA 384/6 provide
graphs showing curves for different full-load hours, BHE patterns and BHE distances. The
correction factors can be obtained from these curves. As an example, no correction for the
operation time is required, but the fact that 2 BHEs are used would lead to a required increase
in BHE length of 3% if the BHE distance is not below 7.5 m (the value for 5 m distance would
be 5%; however, this distance is too short according to VDI 4640). The interim design for 7.5
m distance would be 2 BHEs each 122.5 m deep.

In the last step, the correction for temperatures in the ground and desired extraction
temperatures has to be made, using formulas (19) and (20) given in annex D3 of SIA 384/6.
For the current example, the result of this correction is negligible, so a depth of 123 m for
each BHE is selected.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 125 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

IV. CALCULATION WITH EED

With EED, small projects can also be calculated in a speedy way. The annual heating work is
calculated (12 kW x 1800 h = 21,6 MWh), and the default monthly distribution used for base
load. For peak load, the heat pump heating capacity of 12 kW is given, and a reasonable
number of hours per day (e.g. 18 h in January).
The temperatures shown in Figure 2 were found where a calculation is made for a period of
25 years, and for 2 BHEs each 110 m deep at 7.5 m distance. These are quite suitable (albeit
slightly lower than the 0/-3 °C limits of SIA 384/6, which would be -1.5 °C in EED).

14 g
b
c
d
e
f Fluid temperature
12 b
c
d
e
f
g Peak cool load
b
c
d
e
f
g Peak heat load
10
Fluid temperature [°C]

-2

-4

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Year 25

14 g
b
c
d
e
f Peak min
12 b
c
d
e
f
g Peak max
Annual min-max fluid temp. [°C]

b
c
d
e
f
g Base min
10
b
c
d
e
f
g Base max
8

-2

-4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Year

th
Figure 2. EED-calculation with BHE 2 x 110 m, temperature variation over the 25 year of
operation and minima and maxima over 25 years

GEOTRAINET GSHP 126 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

Table 1 summarizes the various design methods. There are large variances from the smallest
VDI 4640 sizing to the largest SIA 384/6 sizing; boundary conditions and methods differ, and
for VDI 4640 a new version with revised calculation is due in the near future

Method Number BHE Length BHE Total length

VDI 4640, general 2 73,4 m 147 m
VDI 4640, specific 2 55-68 m 110-136 m
SIA 384/6 2 123 m 246 m
EED 2 110 m 220 m

Table 1. Comparison of results for a small project with 12 kW heating capacity

GEOTRAINET GSHP 127 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

CHAPTER 13

BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

(b) A CASE STUDY OF GOOD PRACTICE IN GROUND SOURCE HEATING /

COOLING: AUTO SHOWROOM, OFFICES AND WORKSHOP
VW BUCHAREST – ROMANIA by Radu Polizu and Radu Hanganu-Cucu

I. INTRODUCTION

Bucharest Midocar is a long-standing client of the company ASA GEOEXCHANGE. Over

time, it has been “converted” to the concept of geothermal HVAC systems, using open and
closed loop systems for its buildings located in the north of Bucharest. On the basis of good
operational technical and economical results, Bucharest Midocar decided to install a closed-
loop, borehole-based geothermal HVAC system at a new facility in the eastern part of
Bucharest.

II. PROJECT AREA AND OBJECTIVE

The plans for Midocar
Figure 1. Variation of Thermal Demand for the building
East objective included a
showroom, offices and
repair workshop located
on the left bank of the
Dambovita River. The
development was
constructed with large
south- and west-facing
glass surfaces, its other
exterior walls and
construction elements
were specified with an appropriate thermal resistance for the Bucharest climate. The total
thermal energy demand of the building was calculated to be 1071 MWh/year, with winter peak
heating loads of 390 kW and summer peak cooling loads of 421 kW (Fig. 1).
The solution chosen for the ground heat exchanger was a closed loop array comprising
equally-spaced vertical boreholes (Fig. 2). Data on the building energy demand and the soil
properties was entered into the loop simulation
programme Ground Loop Design. It was
concluded that a 16 x 7 array comprising a
total of 112 boreholes of 140 mm diameter with
72 m thermally active depth would be required
to support the loads. The borehole spacing

GEOTRAINET GSHP 128 Manual for Designers

Figure 2. Equally-spaced boreholes

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

was 5 m. The boreholes were installed with single U 33.4 mm OD PE pipe (1 inch SDR11),
with shank spacers placed at
3 m intervals. The boreholes were sealed with a thermally enhanced bentonite / silica sand
grout with a minimum conductivity 1.7W/m/K.
A thermal response test was conducted on the first borehole, which indicated an average
ground temperature of 13 °C and an average thermal conductivity of 2.01 W/m/K.
The building energy performance is controlled by Direct Digital Control (DDC). The ground
loop is designed such that fluid entry temperature to the heat pumps (EWT) should not fall
below +5 °C in winter mode, while the ΔT (temperature differential) across the heat pumps
should not exceed 3.5 ˚C. For this reason, clean water (with no anti-freeze) was selected as
the carrier fluid. The use of anti-freeze is detrimental to system performance as it reduces
heat transfer efficiency and increases circulation pumping costs. (Of course, to maintain a
high enough fluid temperature to avoid anti-freeze requires capital expenditure on a large
borehole array!).
The project uses a total of a 10 water-to-water heat pumps located in 2 geothermal plant
rooms: one with the showroom and offices, and the other in the workshop. Of these, 7 heat
pumps provide secondary thermal fluid to fan coil units and radiant floors, 2 heat pumps are
dedicated to domestic hot water production, while the remaining heat pump operates in
cooling mode all year round, supporting the 4-way fan coil units. In addition, the building uses
a total of 8 water-to-air heat pumps, which work in tandem with air-to-air heat recovery units.
The DDC system implemented in the building allows precise control of each unit of the HVAC
system. It also permits remote processing and transmission of certain control parameters.

III. RESULTS OF BUILDING MONITORING THROUGHOUT ONE CALENDAR YEAR

The monitoring results are shown in Figures 3a-e, 4 and 5.

Figure 3a.
DDC Showroom
– The control of
internal air
temperature
(red) vs. outside
air temperature
(green)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 129 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

Figure 3b.
DDC Service
– The control
of internal air
temperature
vs. outside
air
temperature
(red)

Figure 3c.

DDC Showroom
– Heat Recovery
System during
January/Februar
y 2010. The red
curve shows
outdoor air
temperature.
Blue =
recirculated air
temperature
from offices;
Green = fresh
air temperature
after heat
recovery unit;
Pink = treated
air temperature.

Figure 3d.
DDC –
Temperature
variation of
borehole heat
exchanger
carrier fluid.
Red = exterior
air temperature
Green = fluid
entering
ground heat
exchanger.
Blue = fluid
entering heat
pump from
borehole heat
exchanger

GEOTRAINET GSHP 130 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

Figure 3e.
DDC –
Electricity
consumption
(green)
[kWh] vs.
outside air
temperature
(red) [°C]

Figure 4.
Monitoring
results of
geothermal
HVAC system
(carrier fluid
temperatures)

Figure 5. Variation of monthly energy consumption

Annual specific electricity consumption: Σedriving = 59.07 kWh/m².yr.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 131 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 13 BHE DESIGN EXAMPLES

Figure 6. Graphic representation of the energy of the system

HP pumps&ventilators
qusable = qgeotermal+edriving + edriving +qHRS=327 kWh/m².yr
(see the above chart)

327 kWh/m².yr
SPFyr = = 5.5
59.07 kWh/m².yr

eRES = qusable (1-1/SPFyr) = 327 (1-1/5.5) = 268 kWh/m².yr

IV. CONCLUSIONS
The HVAC system, using ground-coupled water-to-water and water-to-air heat pumps, not
only utilizes the geothermal heat resource, but recovers significant secondary energies from
the building. The renewable energy produced on location significantly exceeds the electrical
input power. For an electricity conversion factor f EE = 2.5 kWhprimary_energy/kWhelectricity, the
energy ratio according to Directive 2010/31/EC is calculated as:

eRES 268
= = 2.2
Σedriving 2.5 x 59.07

Because eres>>Σedriving, this application can be regarded as a “Nearly-Zero Energy Building”

with zero carbon on location.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 132 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 14

DESIGN OF HORIZONTAL COLLECTORS

by Paul Sikora and Javier Urchueguía

I. INTRODUCTION
The horizontal array is the most demanding of all geothermal collector types in terms of the
ground area required to produce a specified geothermal energy yield. For this reason it is very
seldom used in urban or even suburban installations. Nonetheless, in rural settings or in
regions of low density development, the horizontal array can have advantages over borehole
geothermal collectors. The purpose of this section is to identify and discuss the factors which
must be considered in the evaluation of a site for a possible horizontal collector.

Applications for horizontal arrays are for the most part domestic or small commercial projects.
In such cases it is not normally economical to carry out the comprehensive thermal analysis
needed to produce a closely calculated collector design. In addition, horizontal arrays are
influenced to a significant degree by seasonal variations which limit the usefulness of any
short term thermal measurements. Hence, the geothermal designer must be able to work with
limited information to decide whether the available area at a given site will support an
adequate horizontal collector. Software packages and small-scale measuring equipment are
available to the designer for applications where their use can help to refine the design.

II. THEORETICAL FUNDAMENTALS

The shallow horizontal array (SHA) can be compared in one sense to an unglazed solar
collector with a large thermal mass. The thermal capacity of the soil mass is sufficient to damp
out the daily and short term climatic fluctuations, but the collector parcel still shows significant
temperature swings over a year. In addition, the SHA responds both to precipitation and to
wind. In this section, the major influences which determine the performance of SHA collectors
are enumerated and discussed briefly.

II. 1. Climate
The first factor is the solar flux incident on the parcel. This exerts a direct influence on the
temperature of the collector parcel. Its effect will be influenced by the site particulars: shaded
or open; sloping or flat; the compass orientation of the slope, particularly in high latitudes and
the type of surface cover. A snow cover is beneficial since it reduces the heat losses from the
ground surface. Precipitation, particularly rainfall, has a major influence on SHA performance.
Moisture content has a large bearing on the effective heat capacity of the soil. In addition, it
influences the thermal conductivity of most moisture-permeable soil types. Thirdly, water
percolating through the collector parcel introduces the transport of heat by mass movement in

GEOTRAINET GSHP 133 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 14 DESIGN OF HORIZONTAL COLLECTORS

addition to the mechanism of conduction. For the last-mentioned heat transfer mechanism to
be effective, the soil must be permeable and the parcel must have effective drainage so that it
does not become waterlogged. Moisture migration by repeated evaporation and condensation
may lead to drying out of the soil around the pipe when the SHA is used for cooling
applications. This results in considerably poorer heat transfer properties.
Wind exposure also provides a thermal contact mechanism, but one whose overall effect is
not easy to assess.

II. 2. Soil
The mineral composition of a soil is a factor influencing SHA performance by virtue of its
principal thermal attributes, namely its thermal capacity and thermal conductivity. In the case
of soils, as opposed to the rock underlying them, these factors are secondary indicators rather
than primary determinants of geothermal collector performance.This is because soils are
heterogeneous agglomerates of rock particles and organic matter and water.
The suitability of a soil for use as a geothermal collector depends on the size distribution of
the mineral grains as much, if not more than, on the mineral type itself. The grain size
distribution has a major influence on the dry soil properties, but it has an equally important
influence on the ability of the soil to hold water and to permit its movement through the soil.
Organic matter in the soil plays an important role through its affinity for water, although when
dry it has extremely poor thermal properties. Hence, a good candidate soil for use as a
geothermal SHA will generally be a deep soil, suitable for arable crop production. Clays are
usually poor performers due to their small or negligible water permeability. Silty, sandy and
gravelly soils can be usable but may need special preparation to improve their water
permeability or their moisture holding properties (Boyer & Grondzic, 1987). Saturated sands
and gravels can offer excellent prospects for collectors, due to their high thermal conductivity
and volumetric heat capacity.

II. 3. Topography
If available, a sloping site is generally preferable to one on the level. A sloping site
encourages movement of soil moisture and is less likely to suffer from waterlogging. A site
positioned on a longer slope will be able to take advantage of the downhill migration of soil
moisture. Indeed, if the choice is available, the preferred parcel shape would be a long narrow
ribbon running along a contour in order to intercept the maximum amount of soil water
movement.
The compass aspect or facing of a candidate ground parcel also affects its likely performance
as host for a SHA collector. Especially in higher northern latitudes, a south-facing ground
parcel will intercept more solar flux than one on the flat, and still more than a north-facing one.
The difference is not as significant as for solar panels since the ground parcel is fully
receptive to diffuse solar radiation; but, other things being equal, a south-facing site is
preferable.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 134 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 14 DESIGN OF HORIZONTAL COLLECTORS

Using the same line of reasoning, a site in a hollow is to be avoided if other alternatives are
available. On this type of topography it will also be difficult to lay out the pipework in a way
that does not have a propensity to airlocking.

II. 4. Surface cover

The intended or possible uses envisioned for a ground parcel will have a major bearing on its
suitability for use as a geothermal SHA. Although it is commonly thought that a matt black
surface would be the most desirable type of cover, the fact is that most natural ground
coverings have high solar absorption. The most important single attribute for the surface
cover of a SHA is that it be permeable to moisture. Moisture percolating into the ground
carries heat with it. Moisture maintained in the ground contributes substantially, both to the
thermal storage capacity of the soil and to the ability of heat to move toward or away from the
buried pipes as desired.
Hence, any surface cover which is impermeable to water is likely to degrade the thermal
performance of the collector substantially. This is particularly true for collectors designed to
provide useful cooling. The effect of using water-permeable pavements such as cobble block
or even permeable asphalt has not been fully documented, although some investigations of
this are underway (Greene et al., 2008). The preferred type of cover is typically grass or other
low vegetation. There is also anecdotal experience that vegetables and bush fruits are not
measurably affected by the presence of a properly dimensioned SHA beneath the ground
parcel.

III. PRACTICAL FUNDAMENTALS

The process of evaluating a site for the possible use of a shallow horizontal array collector
consists of finding answers to a few basic questions:
 What is the yearly import and export of thermal energy required by the load at the
site?
 What are the averages of temperature, global solar radiation, rainfall and snow in the
area?
 What are the characteristics of the soil in the area?
 What is the estimated thermal productivity of the soil in the area?
 Can the soil thermal productivity be improved?
 Is the available area sufficient to provide acceptable performance of the GSHP?

The starting point for information about site thermal loads (kW heating and/or cooling) is the
Building Energy Rating or similar document carried out by a qualified professional for the site
in question. This may need to be adjusted by any particular requirements of the client not
covered by the rating exercise. For temperate and northerly latitudes, the requirement is
usually dominated by heating. At lower latitudes, there will often be cooling as well as heating
requirements. The basic result sought is the net annual energy (kWh/yr) to be supplied by or
rejected into the geothermal collector.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 135 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 14 DESIGN OF HORIZONTAL COLLECTORS

These energy import and export amounts must be set against the capability of a potential
SHA at the site. Each square metre of horizontal surface in Europe receives an annual input
2
of solar radiation ranging from more than 2000 kWh/m /year in the sunniest regions, down to
2
about 600 kWh/m /year in the most northerly parts of Europe (European Solar Radiation
2
Atlas, 1984, 1986). Temperate zones receive about 1200 kWh/m /year. The net thermal
energy import or export by geothermal collection must remain small in comparison with the
solar input if the average ground temperature is to remain sensibly undisturbed. For
temperate zones where heating is the dominant if not the only demand of the load, a nominal
2
guideline figure of 50 kWh/m /year is often used to arrive at a collector size estimate. VDI
2
Blatt 2 suggests a range of 50 to 70 kWh/m /year. If the energy rating of the building is, for
2 2
example, 60 kWh/m /year and the building heated area is 150 m , the collector parcel size
should be adequate to supply 60x150 or 9000 kWh/year to the building. Of this amount, only
the fraction (1-1/COP) is supplied by the collector.
For a heat pump having a seasonal performance factor of 4, the guideline SHA parcel area is:
2
(1-1/4) x 9000/50=135 m .
This procedure results in a ratio of almost one square metre SHA area per square metre of
heated building area. This correspondence has given rise to a rough rule, often used as a
feasibility yardstick, but it is important to carry through the exercise for each case since
particular site conditions may easily change the result.
2
If an area of 135 m is available for use as a SHA emplacement zone (free of pipes, cables or
other buried services; not intended for a future building area; not to be paved for car parks or
other use requiring water to be drained from it), then it needs to be examined for geothermal
productivity. This productivity is the ability of the parcel to yield or absorb thermal power fluxes
without developing unacceptably high temperature gradients.
Specific guidance in making this assessment is available from numerous sources.
Descriptions and terminology vary considerably and local experience will also be valuable.
The principles outlined earlier in the section should be kept in mind when assessing a site:
 Visual inspection of an excavation down to the intended emplacement depth will show
the soil morphology and can be used to establish drainage characteristics. Time of
the year must also be noted. Test pits dug for geotechnical evaluation or for
percolation tests can be very useful for this purpose
 Heavy clay layers, shale or other types of broken rock present difficulties which may
make the parcel expensive or unfeasible to develop
 Sands or gravels can be very favourable provided they contain adequate moisture
during the heat pump working season.
2
Promising soil types can yield up to 40 W/m , while very poor types may yield down to 10
2
W/m . These figures are based on a typical temperate European heating season of
approximately 1800 hours (VDI Blatt 2). Much of this difference in collector yield can result
from degrees of moisture saturation, so that rainfall patterns and the yearly use of the system
must enter into the evaluation process.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 136 Manual for Designers

 SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES
CHAPTER 14 DESIGN OF HORIZONTAL COLLECTORS

2
For the example discussed above, the collector parcel of 135 m could support a heat pump
of about 1.8 kW heating capacity (or 1.35 kW of cooling capacity) with the least productive soil
type. These figures would increase to 7.2 kW and 5.4 kW respectively for a high productivity
collector parcel. These results show that collector parcel size alone does not guarantee that a
workable SHA will result.
Semi-quantitative evaluation of potential collector performance requires measurement of soil
thermal properties. Equipment capable of producing this type of information for SHA collectors
is now available in the form of a needle probe device capable of measuring apparent soil
thermal conductivity (Soil Heat/Carbon Zero Consulting, Ltd.). Some software packages,
including Ground Loop Design (GLD) allow the semi-quantitative simulation of different SHA
collectors using soil thermal parameters, loop layout, pipe diameter, etc. as input parameters.

IV. ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND ECONOMIC COST EFFECTIVENESS

There are number of ways in which the GSHP designer can improve the effectiveness of a
SHA collector. It is clear that this collector type can result in considerable reduction in the
overall cost of the system, but its successful implementation will require that the installer is
conversant with techniques for maximizing the performance of a SHA collector.

The following is a list of several measures which have been used to improve such collectors.
The list is by no means exhaustive, but it may suggest other possibilities which a site may
present:
 Reduce the net yearly thermal draw on the parcel. This allows the parcel size to be
reduced. This can be done by a large number of measures, including the channelling
of surface runoff water into the collector; placing the SHA parcel beneath a graywater
percolation area; using the SHA as a source of free cooling during summer; and other
options
 Improve the thermal productivity of the SHA parcel. Free-draining soils can be
improved by incorporating a layer of organic material in the vicinity of the collector
tubing. Low-cost options for such materials include waste silage, spent compost used
for mushroom growing, wood chippings, grass cuttings and others available in the
locality
 Improve the thermal productivity of the SHA parcel. Waterlogging soil parcels can be
improved by adding drainage - via gravel layers, drain pipes or other permeable
elements as convenient
 Choose the most suitable pipe layout and emplacement depth. Many options exist for
the pipe layout and considerable savings in installation work may be realised by
careful selection. In temperate Europe, it is common to bury collectors at depths of
1.2 to 1.5 m. However, in moist temperate zones, collectors may be placed at depths
as shallow as 80 cm where frost is not a problem and where soil conditions permit
and moisture recharge rates are adequate. In any event, a prudent selection must
take account of extreme weather conditions as well as collector installation costs.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 137 Manual for Designers

SECTION E. GSHP SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES

CHAPTER 14 DESIGN OF HORIZONTAL COLLECTORS

V. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography

ASHRAE Handbook; Fundamentals. 2009. ASHRAE Inc USA.

Boyer, L.L., Grondzik, W.T. 1987. Earth Shelter Technology, Texas A&M Press. (A good
general discussion of thermal properties of soils; in particular, Chapter 4, „Earth
Environment‟)

European Solar Radiation Atlas. 1984 and 1996. (Available on the internet).

Greene, M. et al., 2008. Ground Temperature and Moisture Content Surrounding Horizontal
th
Heat Pump Collectors in a Maritime Climate Region. 2008. 9 IEA Heat Pump
Conference, Zurich.

Ground Loop Design Geothermal Design Studio. User‟s Manual. 2007. Gaia Geothermal.

Ochsner, K. 2008. Geothermal Heat Pumps: A Guide for Planning and Installing, Karl,
Earthscan Publishing.

VDI 4640 Blatt 2. 2001. Thermal use of the underground. Ground source heat pump systems.
Verein Deutscher Ingenieure.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 138 Manual for Designers

 SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 15

INSTALLATION AND GROUTING by Walter J. Eugster

I. INTRODUCTION

Installing the Borehole Heat Exchanger (BHE) and grouting the borehole have the same
importance for the completion and the future operation of the system as the drilling itself or as
connecting the BHE to the Heat Pump (HP).

The following key points ensure a good job:

 The borehole must be kept open until grouting has finished. Thus any auxiliary casing
is removed after grouting
 The BHE tubes need very careful handling during transport, on-site storage and
installation
 Grouting needs special attention and care. These are the three main functions of the
grout:
o Sealing the borehole to inhibit any vertical water flows along the BHE
(groundwater protection function)
o Ensuring a good thermal contact between the BHE walls and the surrounding
underground (thermal function)
o Protecting the embedded BHE tubes from mechanical damage (technical
function)
 The installing and grouting work is done by the driller. But the designer should know
what to expect from this working phase.

II. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

II. 1. Preliminary work

It is strongly recommended that some preparatory work is done before inserting the BHE into
the borehole. The drilling staff may do this step during the drilling phase.

The BHE has to be mounted on and fixed to a decoiler (Fig. 1), if the BHE length is longer
than 50 m. This avoids unreeling the BHE on the ground of the construction site, which is a
high risk for any mechanical damage to the BHE. If the BHE is longer than 150 m the decoiler
is preferably equipped with a brake to ensure a slow and careful insertion into the borehole.
The BHE tubes need a visual check to detect damage. For PE100/PN16/SDR11-tubes,
notches and damage of max. 10% of the tube wall thickness are acceptable.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 139 Manual for Designers

SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 15 INSTALLATION AND GROUTING

It is also recommended that a first tube tightness check is performed using air at about 6 bar
to detect damage, especially when the transportation of the BHEs to the construction site
and/or the storing of the BHEs on site were not made under the supervision of the drillers.
Then additional weights are normally fixed at the BHE foot and the injection tube is fixed to
the BHE near to the foot.
Remember: use, preferably, factory welded BHEs. If the foot is welded to the BHE on the
drilling site, the driller needs a valid welding certificate.

Figure 1. BHE on a decoiler during the first Figure 2. Ready-to-insert BHE with an
density test using air (picture: Polydynamics additional weight, protected foot and a fifth
Engineering Zurich) injection tube (picture: Polydynamics
Engineering Zurich)

II. 2. Insertion of the BHE

The BHE is inserted as vertically as possible (Figs 2 and 4) into the borehole. Some drillers
use guide rollers to ensure this. The sharp casing endings should be protected to avoid BHE
damage through abrasion (Fig. 3). The BHE is moved carefully, slowly and with speed control
into the borehole.
The pressure conditions inside/outside the BHE tubes need special attention during insertion:
 BHE must be filled with water if there is water in the borehole

GEOTRAINET GSHP 140 Manual for Designers

 SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 15 INSTALLATION AND GROUTING

 Be aware of the following limits for PE100/PN16/SDR11 tubes:

o p (inner  outer): max. 21 bar
o p (outer  inner): max. 8 bar !!
If this value is exceeded the BHE starts to collapse!!
After complete insertion, the BHE is cut to the required length (often BHEs are only available
at certain specified lengths).
In preparation for the grouting, the BHE is then completely filled with water (Fig. 5), a primary
pressure is applied and the BHE is hermetically sealed (valve). The pressure limits for the
tubes must be taken into account.

Figure 3. Two different casing ending protectors (picture: Polydynamics Engineering Zurich)

Figure 4. Guide rollers to ensure vertical Figure 5. Cut the tubes to required length, fill
insertion (picture: Polydynamics Engineering them with water, apply a first pressure and seal
Zurich) them (picture: Polydynamics Engineering
Zurich)

III. GROUTING

The grouting material itself has to fulfil a number of specifications, given by the local
authorities or by professional associations.

The following material characteristics may be regulated:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 141 Manual for Designers

SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 15 INSTALLATION AND GROUTING

 Minimal Density of the grouting suspension

 Minimal stability of the suspension
 Minimal compression strength of the hardened backfill material
 Maximal hydraulic permeability of the hardened backfill material
 Optionally a minimal thermal conductivity
 Optionally a minimal resistance against structural damage after several freeze-thaw
cycles.

Figure 7. During grouting the auxiliary casing

still prevents the borehole from collapsing.
The BHE is under pressure (picture:
Polydynamics Engineering Zurich)

Figure 6. Various types of grouting equipment

(pictures: Polydynamics Engineering Zurich)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 142 Manual for Designers

 SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 15 INSTALLATION AND GROUTING

Industrially fabricated and bagged backfilling material with a constant blending and controlled
quality is the preferred solution. Self-made mixtures on the drilling site never have the same
constant quality as industrially blended materials.
Grouting material is either mixed in tanks of a given volume and then pumped tank by tank
through the injection pipe into the borehole, or it is continuously mixed using a proportioning
pump (Fig. 6). The quality of the grout suspension must be constant over the whole grouting
procedure and has to be checked by density measurements.
To guarantee the groundwater protection features of the grout material, the driller has to
follow exactly the manufacturer‟s mixing recipe.
The Borehole is grouted either using the previously fixed injection pipe or sometimes using
metallic BHE mounting rods which then are removed rod by rod during grouting (Fig. 7).
Basically and essentially, grouting must be done from the bottom to the top of the borehole
following the so-called contractor process. The injection pipe is left in the borehole and the
deepest rod must be kept below the grout material level over the whole grouting process.
Grouting from the top using any buckets or pumping the suspension from the surface is not
permitted.
The grouting process is finished, when the out-flowing grout suspension at the wellhead has
the required quality. Now the auxiliary casing is removed and the BHE is prepared for final
testing.
Note: To avoid uncontrolled gas or water outflow from the borehole, the grouting process has
to take place immediately after inserting the BHE!!
Due to the limits regarding the pressure difference inside/outside the BHE, the following
system limits and recommendations are given for PE100/PN16/SDR11 BHEs (Table 1).

Density of grout Allowed BHE length Grouting only when BHE length exceeds
suspension without reservation BHEs are pressure limitations
hermetically sealed
3
1200 kg/m up to 400 m no limitation no limitation
3
1400 kg/m 200 m > 200 m no limitation
3
1600 kg/m 120 m 120 – 340 m > 340 m
3
1800 kg/m 100 m 100 – 260 m > 260 m
3
2000 kg/m 80 m 80 – 200 m > 200 m

Table 1. Technical limits for PE100/PN16/SDR11 BHEs

There are many different grouting materials on the market. Some of those have a higher
thermal conductivity, others show a higher resistance against freeze-thaw cycles and others
need only a short time until a rather high compression and/or shear strength is provided.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 143 Manual for Designers

SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 15 INSTALLATION AND GROUTING

Therefore, there is a wide range of different products with different physical properties. It is up
to the drillers or the designers to choose the optimal material for their purposes. In addition, of
course, the price of the grout is an important criterion for the clients in an open market.
A higher thermal conductivity, for example, lowers the borehole resistance and increases the
thermal capacity of the BHE. This is a big advantage especially in the cooling case. In the
heating case, the total BHE length could be reduced under certain circumstances.
Both a higher thermal conductivity or a higher resistance against freeze-thaw cycles induce
higher density of the grout suspension. This could lead to reaching the technical limits of the
BHEs more quickly. It is moreover a question of the total system design.

IV. TIPS AND REMARKS FOR DESIGNERS

Licensing authorities may impose special conditions regarding BHE quality, length, position,
grouting, etc. – always follow these!
To avoid delays due to non-professional work, it is advised to contract only experienced,
certified BHE drillers with nationally or internationally accepted well-known labels or
certificates who will ensure:

 Skilled drilling staff to carry out the scoped work

 Suitable drilling expertise to deal with specific site geology and hydrogeology
 The use of drill rigs equipped with adequate safety equipment to detect, e.g., gas and
artesian water outflows as well as drilling staff trained to face such incidents.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 144 Manual for Designers

 SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 16

FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL by Walter J. Eugster

I. SYSTEM CONTROL

Leakage, pressure, temperature (Fig. 1)

The Borehole Heat Exchanger (BHE) circuit must at the least be equipped with:
 Filling and flushing fittings
 A de-aeration device
 A pressure-relief valve
 A manometer
 A pressure control device
 An expansion vessel
and preferably;
 An anti-icing control device (if no anti-freeze is added)
 Temperature devices.

Each individual BHE circuit must be equipped with a flow control and shut-off valve to allow
for adjustment of flow and pressure drop of each individual circuit.
Note: the natural expansion of deeper BHE tubes (forced by the weight of the fluid column at
lengths >ca. 250-300 m) could exceed the calculated ordinary expansion vessel volume. This
effect depends on the grout material.

II. TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND DOCUMENTATION

II.1. Final testing

The final testing of a BHE consists of two stages:
a) a flow test
b) a leak tightness test (pressure test).
Before performing the tests, it is necessary to flush the BHE tubes (Fig. 2), preferably from
both sides, to clean the BHE and flush out dirt or any other remains in the tubes.

a). Flushing the BHE

Fresh water is pumped through each BHE circuit to flush out any dirt particles, preferably from
both sides, until each circuit is completely flushed once.

b). Flow test

The aim of the flow test is to prove that the tested BHE circuit does not have an increased
pressure drop, i.e. an increased hydraulic resistance (Figs 3, 4).

GEOTRAINET GSHP 145 Manual for Designers

SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL

Expansion tank

Pressure control device (leakage control)

Pressure-relief valve and manometer
Circulation pump (suitable for
BHE manifold deployed heat carrier)

Condenser:
Heating or storage circuit

Supply pipes to heat pump Heat pump

Y-shaped BHE
joint

Figure 1. Example of a minimal equipment of primary circuits featuring 2 BHEs (drawing from SIA
384/6 (SN 546 384/6))

Mindestspüldauer für einen Umgang bei ø40 mm EWS pro Kreis

Durchfluss in Liter pro Stunde pro Kreis

0 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 3600 4200 4800
30 1.80

1.68
Strömungsgeschwindigkeit in
Abhängigkeit der
1.56
.

Druchflussrate
25
1.44
.
Zeit in Minuten für die Mindestspüldauer

1.32
Strömungsgeschwindigkeit in [m/s]

20 1.20

1.08

0.96
300 m
15
250 m
0.84
200 m
175 m 0.72
165 m
10 127 m 0.60

0.48

0.36
5
0.24

0.12
102m 140m 152 m 185 m 225 m 275 m 350 m
0 0.00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Durchfluss in Liter pro Minute pro Kreis

Figure 2. Example for the minimal flushing duration per circuit for a BHE tube Ø 40x32.6 mm
as a function of the flow rate and the BHE length (graph from SIA 384/6 (SN 546 384/6))

GEOTRAINET GSHP 146 Manual for Designers

 SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL

2 manometers 0 - 4 bars
or 0 - 6 bars
P P

flow control flowmeter or

valve water meter

Figure 3. Flow test configuration (graph: Polydynamics Engineering Zurich)

Durchflussdiagramm EWS ø40mm Wasser 15°C

Durchfluss in Liter pro Stunde pro EWS Kreis

0 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 3600 4200 4800
3.00 350 m
30
300 m
2.75
275 m
250 m
2.50
25 225 m
difference in [bars]

2.25 200 m
185 m
.
Druckdifferenz in bar .

2.00 20
mWs
in [bars]

1.75
difference in
Druckdifferenz

1.50 15

1.25
Pressure
Pressure

1.00 10

0.75
175 m
165 m
0.50 5
152 m
0.25 140 m
127 m
0.00 0 102 m
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Durchfluss in Liter pro Minute pro EWS Kreis
Flow rate in litre per hour and per circuit circuit

Figure 4. Theoretical maximal allowed pressure drop per circuit of a BHE, tube Ø 40x32.6 mm (graph from SIA 384/6
(SN 546 384/6))

GEOTRAINET GSHP 147 Manual for Designers

SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL

A slight overpressure (outside  inside) during installation may deform the BHE tubes to an
oval shape with a smaller sectional area. This effect increases the pressure drop. Possibly a
larger circulation is then needed to ensure the projected flow rate.
The pressure difference (inflow – outflow) at constant flow rate must not exceed a certain
theoretical value. The flow test may be combined with the tube flushing.
The equipment needed to perform the flow test is as follows:
 2 manometers (0 - 4 or 0 - 6 bar)
 1 flow control valve
 1 flow meter (an impeller water meter is sufficient).

c). Leak tightness test (pressure test)

Leak tightness (pressure) testing has to follow the EN 805 prescriptions. For polyethylene
(PE) tubes, the pressure testing has to be carried out as a „compression test‟. An
overpressure (inside  outside) is applied to the pipe over the whole length. This step inflates
slightly the PE pipe over its whole length. Then a sudden pressure drop of around 10% of the
testing pressure is applied (Fig. 5). This pressure drop allows the pipe to compress again. If
the pipe is tight, a pressure increase is measured.

de-aeration device

manometer 0 - 16 bars
P

valve valve
high-pressure pump
or
manually operated pump

Figure 5. Leak tightness test configuration (graph: Polydynamics Engineering Zurich)

To perform such a test, the following equipment is needed:

 A high-pressure pump or a manually operated pump
 2 stop valves

GEOTRAINET GSHP 148 Manual for Designers

 SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL

 1 manometer 0 -16 bar

 A de-aeration device, if both circuits are tested at once
This pressure test must be carried out immediately after having finished the grouting
and when the grout material has still not hardened.
Test pressure for PE100/PN16/SDR11 tubes is recommended as follows after SIA 384/6 (SN
546 384/6):
 Overpressure at BHE foot: > 0.5 bar during testing
 Pressure at BHE heat: > 7.5 bar.

Test procedure in detail (Fig. 6):

 1 h Idle period. No overpressure is applied to the tube 
 Apply the test pressure. For PE100/PN16/SDR11 BHEs see Table 1. For other
materials follow the manufacturer‟s specification 
 10 min Keep up pressure test 
 1 h Idle period. The tube is going to expand over the whole length

 Pressure measurement. The pressure drop may not exceed the manufacturer‟s
specifications 
 Sudden pressure drop of at least 10% of the test pressure  

 10 mins. First pressure measurement  A

 20 mins. Second pressure measurement  B

 30Dichtigkeitsprüfung von
mins. Third and final Erdwärmesonden
pressure  C an SN EN 805
in Anlehnung
measurement
13

Beginn deridle
Start Ruhezeit 60 Minuten.
period (60 min.).
 Max. Druckabfall
Maximal vom
pressure drop according
12
 Anfangsdruck gemäss
manufacturer’s Hersteller
specifications
E
Ende
Endder Ruhezeit
of idle period60
(60Minuten.
min.).
11
10 minutes.
aufbringen

End of
Ende dermain test (30 min.).
Hauptprüfung 30
10 Pressure drop
Druckabfall bei of PE100,SDR11
PE-100 SDR 11, PN16 tubes: Minuten. Der Druck
Max. allowed darfloss
pressure von
max.
30 %30%
maximal

Maximal of initial test pressure (3).

in [bars]

6A bis 6C,
between 6Aresp.
and 6Cvomor highest
vom Anfangsdruck
Druck in bar

for 10 minutes

Maximum um6C
pressure and maximal 0.10
respectively
.
Druck

bar abfallen.
is 0.1 bar.
10 Min. for

9
Druck halten
maxpressure
Pressure


Min.pressure

8
E
Increase

A B C
10 test

7
Hold


Pressure drop: 1.21.2
Druckabsenkung
Beginn der main
bar,
test.
start of
bar,
Hauptprüfung.

6 Measure volume
Abgelassene of drained
Wassermenge 
notieren. water.

5
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Test
Zeittime in [minutes]
in Minuten

Figure 6. Graphical test procedure (graph from SIA 384/6 (SN 546 384/6)).

GEOTRAINET GSHP 149 Manual for Designers

SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL

The BHE has passed the test if the pressure difference (pressure drop) between  C and
 A does not exceed 0.1 bars.
The upper part should not be filled up with water in cold weather, when there is a risk of
freezing.
Density of grout suspension
BHE length
3 3 3 3 3
1200 kg/m 1400 kg/m 1600 kg/m 1800 kg/m 2000 kg/m

60 m 8.0 bar 8.0 bar 9.0 bar 10.0 bar 11.0 bar

80 m 8.0 bar 9.0 bar 10.0 bar 12.0 bar 14.0 bar

100 m 8.0 bar 9.0 bar 11.0 bar 14.0 bar 17.0 bar

120 m 8.0 bar 10.0 bar 13.0 bar 17.0 bar 21.0 bar

140 m 8.0 bar 11.0 bar 15.0 bar 19.0 bar 24.0 bar

160 m 9.0 bar 12.0 bar 17.0 bar 22.0 bar 27.0 bar

180 m 9.0 bar 13.0 bar 19.0 bar 25.0 bar 31.0 bar

200 m 9.0 bar 14.0 bar 21.0 bar 27.0 bar 34.0 bar

220 m 10.0 bar 15.0 bar 23.0 bar 30.0 bar no BHE

Test pressure for different BHE lengths and grout suspension densities.

No ordinary leak tightness testing. Testing only according to manufacturer‟s

specifications.

Table 1. Test pressure determination for PE100/PN16/SDR11 BHEs

(after SIA 384/6 (SN 546384/6))
After the final testing, the BHEs commonly are commissioned to the client (owner or installer
respectively).

Figure 7. Protection of the BHE endings Figure 8. Example for sealing the BHE after
(picture: Polydynamics Engineering Zurich) final testing (picture: Polydynamics
Engineering Zurich)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 150 Manual for Designers

 SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL

The final connection to the complete heat pump system could take place later – from a few
days up to several months. Therefore, the BHEs have to be protected from any occasional
damage during further construction work. The BHE endings are closed soundly and the BHE
endings are marked and protected (Figs 7, 8).

III. COMMISSIONING

The final testing of the BHEs represents the commissioning of the BHE drilling work. The
client should receive an invitation to attend the final testing. All driller logs and test records are
handed over to the client.
This is the moment, the driller hands his responsibility for the BHEs to the customer and the
legal warranty starts to run.
A final commissioning takes place when the complete heat pump (HP) system is finished.
This includes at least the following points:
 Leak tightness test of the complete hydraulic system
 Check system temperatures, pressures and flow rates
 Check the function of each device
 Run the heat pump system
 Hand out a complete documentation to the customer
 Instruction of the future system operator in using and maintaining the system and
what to do in case of a disruption.

IV. DOCUMENTATION

If there are no relevant national regulations, at the least the following data have to be attached
on site (heat pump) and documented in the project papers:
 Year of construction
 Drilling company
 Number, length and distance of the BHEs
 Length and diameters and supply/return pipes between heat pump and BHEs
 Brand, exact product description and mixture of heat carrier
 Volume of BHE circuits
 Flow rate and delivery height of the circulation pump(s)
 Brand and exact product name of the HP
 Heat and refrigeration capacity of the HP at design temperature.
The following additional data should complete the project papers:
 Drilling log and profile and – if applicable – the geological expertise
 Site map with exact (measured) location of the BHEs and the supply/return pipes
 Calculated capacity of the BHEs (dimensioning)
 Final test logs and records of delivery (commissioning).

GEOTRAINET GSHP 151 Manual for Designers

SECTION F. GSHP INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL AND QUALITY CONTROL

V. MAINTENANCE

In principle, a BHE installation is maintenance-free! Nevertheless, a few points should be

checked:
 Measure or look up the system pressure (yearly by the operator). Note the value in a
log file
 Record each addition of liquids (water or antifreeze, added volume, pressure before
and after adding)
 Check the antifreeze protection of the heat carrier every 10 years.

VI. MONITORING

System monitoring delivers the base of any future system optimization. The system control
should record and preferably store the following system parameters:
 Total time of operation
 Minimal supply and return temperature of the BHE circuit
 Supply and return temperature of the heat/user circuit
 Optionally: electric power consumption.

If there is no automatic data logger, recall these values from the system control and note them
in a log file.
For smaller installations, record or recall these parameters in the beginning on a daily or
weekly basis; later on, a monthly or yearly recording/recalling is sufficient.
For larger installations, a more detailed and automatic monitoring is recommended.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 152 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 17

EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

by David Norbury with Burkhard Sanner

I. INTRODUCTION
Geothermal heating and cooling is an immature market in Europe as a whole so that there is
little in the way of European level standardization or normalization of the design or installation
of ground source heat pump systems. In some countries, the market has been in existence for
longer and has developed to the point that there is a substantial market which has prompted
development of the national standards for various aspects of the design and installation.

This chapter sets out the situation on normative standards across Europe and considering
national situations, and summarizes the key aspects of the most important available
standards. The way forward in the development of further normalization is identified for
discussion.
For Geothermal energy and heat pumps, three different areas have to be distinguished in the
installation process, and they are typically covered by different workforces:
a) Installation on the geothermal side (drilling, pipe laying, well construction, etc.). No
standards at EU level exist
b) Heat pumps (work with refrigerating/thermodynamic systems, systems under
pressure, electrical safety, etc.). A number of standards exist at European or
international level
c) Classical heating and air conditioning installation (plumbing, radiators, air ductwork,
etc.).
For the electrical side, IEC has developed a number of standards in the IEC 60335 series
about safety of household and similar electrical appliances that are ratified on a European
level. Item c) rules are identical for any conventional heating and cooling installation.
The overall status of implementation of Standards across Europe is:
 Heat Pumps – there are comprehensive and harmonized technical standards for the
equipment
 EU member states (plus Switzerland and Norway) have adopted the EN standards for
testing, rating and safety of heat pumps
 EN Standards exist only for safety of drill rigs (shallow wells), and from the petroleum
industry (which may have some relevance for any deep well drilling that might be
carried out)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 153 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

 For shallow geothermal systems, technical standards exist in the countries where the
market is already well developed. This includes Germany, Sweden, Austria and
Switzerland
 Certification of installers and drillers exists only in those countries where the market
has matured.
In the Geothermal and heat pump sector, standards and codes can be classified in various
ways:
o Technical standards for efficiency, safety, longevity etc apply mainly for the
heat pump sector
o Technical standards for environmental protection, as for drilling, borehole
heat exchangers, etc. apply mainly for the ground side (geothermal)
o Regulations and guidelines for licensing of geothermal systems (typically
concerning groundwater protection), include legal regulations for the access
to and ownership of the geothermal resources
o Certification of skill and work quality for installers and drillers.

II. EUROPEAN STANDARDS

For heat pump equipment there is a comprehensive and well harmonized set of technical
standards. For shallow geothermal systems in general, technical standards exist in those
countries where the market has already developed. The main administrative and licensing
barriers applying to geothermal works are well covered by the overall EN standards.

Heat pump equipment is covered by a comprehensive and well harmonized set of technical
standards. Member states have adopted the basic EN standards for testing and rating, safety,
etc. into national standardization; Switzerland, Norway and Iceland have joined into the same
set of standards. While not all relevant EN standards are yet implemented in all member
states, the process is well under way.
In the same process, most pre-existing national standards have been withdrawn and replaced
by EN standards. National standards existed in particular in the traditional heat pump
countries like Austria, Germany, Sweden and Switzerland. In several cases, pre-existing
national standards are kept valid for specific areas not covered by the EN standards.
For geothermal energy, EN standards exist only for the safety of drill rigs (shallow
geothermal), and for the sector of the petroleum industry (which has some relevance for deep
geothermal, together with US API standards). The standards from the petroleum industry are
listed only in the common EN form, and their national adaptation is only apparent in Germany
and France.
For shallow geothermal systems in general, technical standards exist in those countries
where the market has already developed. This includes Germany, Sweden, Austria, and the
non-member-state Switzerland. A similar situation also pertains for the certification/licensing
of installers and drillers. Guidelines concerning the legal regulations for geothermal

GEOTRAINET GSHP 154 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

installations exist only in some countries, with the most developed requirements being in
some German states, and in some Swiss cantons.
Existing European Standards are listed below for information (Table 1), for those involved in
the design of geothermal systems. The status of National Specifications (e.g. DIN, VDI) varies
between countries.

EN 378-1:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps – Safety and environmental

requirements – Part 1: Basic requirements, definitions,
classification and selection criteria
The 2008 revision included harmonization with the European
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).
(EN 378 is widely used as a basic Standard across much of the
European Union as well as in many adjoining countries)
EN 255-3 Air conditioners, liquid chilling packages and heat pumps with
electrically driven compressors - Heating mode - Testing and
requirements for marking for domestic hot water units
EN 14511- Air conditioners, liquid chilling packages and heat pumps with
1:2004 electrically driven compressors for space heating and cooling –
Parts 1-4
ISO 13256- Water-source heat pumps -- Testing and rating for performance -
1:1998 Part 1: Water-to-air and brine-to-air heat pumps
ISO 13256- Water-source heat pumps -- Testing and rating for performance -
2:1998 Part 2: Water-to-water and brine-to-water heat pumps
EN 12171:2002 Heating systems in buildings. Procedure for the preparation of
documents for operation, maintenance and use. Heating systems
not requiring a trained operator
EN 12170:2002 Heating systems in buildings. Procedure for the preparation of
documents for operation, maintenance and use. Heating systems
requiring a trained operator
EN 12828:2003 Heating systems in buildings – Design for water based heating
systems
EN 12831:2003 Heating systems in buildings - Method for calculation of the design
heat load
EN 1 Heating systems in buildings - Method for calculation of system
5316/4/2:2008 energy requirements and system efficiencies - Part 4-2: Space
heating generation systems, heat pump systems
EN 15450:2007 Heating systems in buildings. Design of heat pump heating
systems

Table 1. European Standards

GEOTRAINET GSHP 155 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

The content of these national Standards provide useful reference of local best practice and
should be included as references for technical purposes.

There are also a number of Standards on drilling (Table 2) which may be relevant to shallow
geothermal systems.

EN 791:1996 Drill Rigs Safety

ISO 3551:1992 Rotary core drilling equipment System A
ISO 3552:1992 Rotary core drilling equipment System B
ISO 10097:1999 Wireline diamond core drilling equipment System A
ISO 10098:1992 Wireline diamond core drilling equipment System CSSK
EN 12717:2001 Safety of machine tools, drilling machines
EN ISO Geotechnical investigation and testing – Sampling methods and
22475/1:2006 groundwater measurements - Part 1: Technical principles for
execution

Table 2. Standards on drilling

The Normative Standard “Heating systems in buildings – Design of heat pump heating
systems”, EN 15450 October 2007, concerns the design of heat pump systems not only for
water and ground-source but for air-source as well. It is the first EN standard for the heat
pump system in general.
EN 15450 elucidates the basic problem for a geothermal standard on a European level:
 Climatic conditions throughout Europe vary widely giving large differences in heating/
cooling demand
 Geological conditions vary widely from unconsolidated soils to hard, crystalline rock
 Traditions in heating and cooling vary significantly (e.g. hydraulic versus air-based
systems, closed loop versus open loop).
As a result, it is recognised that EN 15450 can only give a general minimum framework for
design and installation, with many items to be filled in locally or regionally.
This standard contains the following sections:
 System requirements
 Installation requirements
 Commissioning of the system
 Maintenance requirements.
According to this European Norm, the first appropriate parameter to be defined for the system
design is the heat source which can be air, water or ground. Moreover, the electrical supply
must be ensured as well as the positioning of the installation and its noise level. If an
additional back-up heater is needed, its power has to be reduced to a minimum since it is not
a renewable energy technology. Furthermore, domestic hot water tank and other attached
systems such as buffer storage must be specified. The control of the system, safety

GEOTRAINET GSHP 156 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

arrangements and operational requirements are of the utmost importance and must be
defined according to the standards.
In the commissioning of the system the following must be fulfilled:
o Checking of the system in satisfactory and safe operation
o Checking all components of the system in operation according to the design
conditions
o Tuning of control parameters in order to meet the operation conditions
according to the design
o Balancing the heat distribution system.
Concerning maintenance requirements for the system, there is reference to the EN 12170 and
EN 12171. Moreover, it is mentioned that the staff involved in maintenance of the system
must be qualified and certified according to EN 13313.
Finally, there are four annexes which contain the following:
 Annex A (informative) – Guidelines for determining design parameters
 Annex B (normative) – Guideline for designing heat pump systems
 Annex C (normative) – Recommended minimum and target values for the SPF
 Annex D (normative) – Average daily tapping patterns for domestic hot water
production.
Differences can be seen between different countries in terms of implementation of European
Standards:
o Denmark and Sweden have adopted all relevant EN standards into national
standards, and have a wide range of national standards, legal regulations,
and licensing/certification of companies and persons
o France has adopted the relevant EN standards into national standards, and
has some national standards, too. Certification of drillers and installers has
started
o Romania has already adopted most relevant EN standards into national
standards, and does not have much more in national standards. For licensing
and legal matters, only deep Geothermal is yet covered.

III. NATIONAL STANDARDS

Technical standards for heating and heat pumps exist at a national level in countries where
the market is well developed such as Austria, Germany, Sweden and Switzerland.

These national standards are listed below (Table 3) and are generally in the local language
except VDI 4640 which is available in both German and English.
The most advanced and comprehensive national Standard is the German document VDI
4640. This German standard focuses especially on the GSHP system as a whole (mainly in
part 2), in contrast to the others that focus more on discrete elements of the system. The
contents of this document are as follows:
• Part 1: General / Licenses / Environment, status 2001-06

GEOTRAINET GSHP 157 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

• Part 2: Ground Source Heat Pumps, status Dec. 2001-09, under revision
• Part 3: UTES, status 2001-06
• Part 4: Direct uses (cooling, ground-air heat exchanger), status 2004-09.

Country Document Document Title Date

Number
AT ÖNORM M 7753 Heat pumps with electrically driven compressors for 1995
direct expansion, ground coupled
AT ÖNORM M 7755- Electrically driven heat pumps 2000
2+3
AT ÖWAV Regelblatt Thermal use of the groundwater and the 2009
207 underground, heating and cooling
CH AWP T1 Heating system with borehole heat exchangers 2007
CH AWP T2 Heating system with horizontal ground collector, 2007
energy piles or energy cages
CH AWP T3 Groundwater as heat source 2007
CH AWP T5 Filling of borehole heat exchanger systems 2007
CH SIA D 0190 Use of earth heat through foundation piles and other 2005
building parts in contact with the ground
CH SIA 384/6 Borehole heat exchangers for 2009 2009
(SN 565) heating and cooling
DE DIN8901 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps – Protection 2002
of soil, ground and surface water
DE VDI 4640 Blatt 1 Thermal use of the underground – part 1: 2009
Fundamentals, approvals, environmental aspects
DE VDI 4640 Blatt 2 Thermal use of the underground – part 2: Ground 2001
source heat pumps
DE VDI 4640 Blatt 3 Thermal use of the underground – part 3: 2002
Underground thermal energy storage
DE VDI 4640 Blatt 4 Thermal use of the underground – part 4: Direct 2004
uses
DE DE DIN 8901 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Protection 2002
of soil, ground and surface water
SE Normbrunn-07 Drilling for water wells and energy 2008
* Note that Switzerland: AWP T1 is the first Standard to call for grouting to be carried out from
bottom to top of the borehole installation.

Table 3. National standards

The first part of VDI 4640 refers to the following general information for GSHP systems:
– Fundamentals concerning the definition of geothermal energy and the principles
for the design of a GSHP system
– Approvals concerning water rights as well as mining law
– Safety aspects of the heat pumps
– Location assessment concerning small systems up to 30kW depending on
assumptions and estimates
– Environmental aspects concerning the material selection for installations in the
underground such as pipes, water mixture, etc.

The second part of VDI 4640 refers to design and installation of a complete GSHP system:
– Groundwater well systems (design and installation)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 158 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

– Closed-loop systems
– horizontal loops – horizontal ground heat exchangers (design and installation)
– vertical loops - borehole heat exchangers (design and installation)
– Special features of systems with direct evaporation (design and installation)
– Characteristics of other heat sources such as “energy piles”, compact horizontal
ground heat exchangers etc
– Incorporating the system (manifolds & collectors, fittings & pumps, connections
pipes between manifolds and heat pumps, dimensioning the pipes and pumps)
– Heat usage systems
– Dismantling GSHP systems.

The third part of VDI 4640 refers to thermal energy storage, more specifically:
– General information of thermal energy storage (definitions, special environmental
aspects, choice of materials for higher temperatures)
– Incorporation into an energy supply system (energy balance, temperature levels,
utilization ratio of the storage system, uses: storage of cold and/or of low-
temperature heat with or without a heat pump, solar energy and heat storage,
heat and power cogeneration plant coupled with heat storage, complex energy
supply systems utilizing and storing waste heat, further system variants of
underground thermal energy storage)
– Aquifer storage (system description, natural site requirements, site exploration,
design of the wells, special aspects relating to the licensing of aquifer storage,
possible operating problems arising from the chemical composition of the
groundwater)
– BHEs (geometry of the storage system, layout, construction)
– Other underground thermal storage (cavern storage, abandoned mines, near-
natural underground thermal energy storage systems).

The fourth part of VDI 4640 refers to thermal source systems without using a heat pump,
more specifically:
– Direct thermal use of ground water (system description, environmental influence
and special aspects relating to water management and water legislation, design)
– Direct thermal use of the underground with borehole heat exchangers, energy
piles, etc. (system description, environmental aspects and questions relating to
water legislation, construction and installation including dismantling)
– Air heating and cooling in the underground (system description, environmental
aspects, air hygiene, design, installation, selection of materials, dismantling,
control strategies, economic efficiency).
The drilling and ground testing standard EN ISO 22475/1 requires that at least the following
information shall be available prior to work being allowed to start in the field:
– objective of the measurements
– location of the planned boreholes or groundwater measurements

GEOTRAINET GSHP 159 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

– orientation, inclination and acceptable deviations in boreholes

– surveying requirements, and expected geological and hydrogeological conditions
– frequency of measurements
– environmental and safety risks
– possible risks, e.g. services, traffic, ordnance, contamination)
– planned depths of boreholes and/or excavations
– in situ tests intended
– hole completion method and reinstatement
– environmental care
– emergency arrangements
– backfilling and restoration of work areas to ensure that no hazards are left to
harm the public, the environment or animals in accordance with regulations.
Testing of conditions at a site in order to determine the suitability for and design of the GSPH
is included within a number of other standards such as:

ISO 14686:2003. Hydrometric determinations. Pumping tests for water wells.

Considerations and guidelines for design, performance and use.

IV. COMMISSIONING, MAINTENANCE, COMPETENCE, CERTIFICATION, PERMITTING

Commissioning of a constructed system must include checks that the:
– system is operating satisfactory and safely
– all components of the system are operating according to the design conditions
– tuning of control parameters
– balancing of the heat distribution system.
The assessment of competence of operators and audit of their continued competence is
considered by many to be a prerequisite for a healthy GSHP market. The certification of
drillers, installers etc and generally of all specialists that contribute to the design, installation
and maintenance of GSHP systems is a very important issue in order to guarantee the proper
operation of the system.
One of the commonest barriers to increased use of geothermal energy is the permitting
process where permits may be required for the use of groundwater as heat source and for
drilling.

IV. 1. Commissioning and maintenance

Testing of heat pumps is included within a number of standards (Table 4). For the
maintenance requirements, there is reference to EN12170 and EN12171. Personnel involved
in maintenance of the system must be qualified and certified according to EN13313.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 160 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

ISO 14686:2003 Hydrometric determinations. Pumping tests for water wells. Considerations and
guidelines for design, performance and use
ISO 13256- Water-source heat pumps - Testing and rating for performance - Part 1: Water-to-
1:1998 air and brine-to-air heat pumps
ISO 13256- Water-source heat pumps - Testing and rating for performance - Part 2: Water-to-
2:1998 water and brine-to-water heat pumps
EN 14336:2004 Heating systems in buildings – Installation and commissioning of water based
heating systems
Table 4. Heat pumps testing standards

IV. 2. Competence and audit

The assessment of competence of operators and audit of their continued competence is
considered by many to be a prerequisite for a healthy GSHP market. This is also one of the
main concerns of the European Commission in that without such measures, the public will be
left open to poor service by less scrupulous operators. The main recent European Standard
which is relevant in this area comes from the geotechnical field but can be taken to be
relevant in the GSHP field. The requirements are not so high that this should pose a problem
to any reputable operator involved in construction and installation of GSHP.
EN ISO 22475/ Geotechnical investigation and testing -- Sampling methods and groundwater
measurements -- Part 2: Qualification criteria for enterprises and personnel defines the
required competencies of the:
– Responsible Expert
– Qualified Driller
– Enterprise (or company).
The responsible expert shall have proven knowledge concerning:
– laws, health and safety regulations, rules and standards
– geology, hydrogeology, soil and rock mechanics
– knowledge of EN ISO 22475-1
– the quality assurance system.
The responsible expert shall be able to understand the aim of the work programme, supervise
the work of the qualified driller and to call for additional expertise if required.
The qualified driller shall have documented competence regarding:
– basic knowledge of the purpose of ground investigation
– mechanical and hydrogeological principles
– excavation methods and groundwater measurements including borehole
backfilling
– completion of records according to EN ISO 22475-1
– relevant health, safety and environmental regulations
– functioning, safe operation and maintenance of the equipment
– the quality assurance system.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 161 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

The enterprise carrying out investigation or works according to EN ISO 22475-1 shall be able
to provide:
– experienced personnel and appropriate facilities
– a health and safety system
– a quality assurance system
– that all equipment in use shall comply with the appropriate technical
specifications, be correctly maintained, calibrated and used
– a qualified driller who shall be continuously present and responsible for the
performance of sampling, measurements and recording at each drill rig
– compliance with bylaws, health and safety regulations and technical rules
– cover for public liability.

EN ISO 22475/3:2007 Geotechnical investigation and testing -- Sampling methods and

groundwater measurements -- Part 3: Conformity assessment of enterprises and personnel
by third party requires that a conformity assessment of the applicant enterprise shall
demonstrate the ability to meet all the qualification criteria according to EN ISO/TS 22475-2.
When full assessment is judged satisfactory, the conformity assessment body will issue a
certificate to the enterprise which is to be valid for 3 years.
There are also standards on certification in connection with refrigeration systems:
EN ISO 17024:2003. Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating
certification of persons
EN 13313:2001. Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Competence of personnel.

IV. 3. Certification
The certification of drillers, installers, etc. and generally of all specialists that contribute to the
design, installation and maintenance of GSHP systems is a very important issue in order to
guarantee the proper operation of the system. Certified designers, manufacturers and
installers (including drillers) are necessary to ensure high efficiency and longevity of a GSHP
system. Also for the certification of drilling companies, joint basic rules should be developed in
order to facilitate cross-border service.
For all parties involved in GSHP drilling and installation, only a few countries have existing
schemes for licenses and certification for heat pumps or geothermal energy. Normally only
the general rules for work and trade apply; these may in some instances act as trade barriers.
It must be ensured that existing and upcoming special regulations will not prevent the
exchange of work and services in the common market.
For the heat pump installation, the EU-CERT.HP programme may prove very helpful, and has
the potential for a common application throughout EU-27. National quality certificates such as
in France are voluntary and may be included in a common scheme or may continue in co-
existence without problems. No common activity exists yet for the ground side. For setting up
such schemes, the cooperation of the relevant professional bodies and industrial associations
will be necessary, in order to ensure acceptance of the resulting programmes in the
Geothermal sector.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 162 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

Well drilling for water or shallow Geothermal used to be a regional business and so EU-wide
rules have not been important. Some national certifications for drilling companies can develop
into a barrier, if they are made mandatory by regional authorities. Relevant certifications from
other member states need to be made acceptable to the authorities in other parts of Europe.
Hence a common EN standard based on the national approaches should be initiated.
At present, certification for drillers exists only in Germany, Sweden and Switzerland and in
Austria this matter is under development (Table 5).

DVGW W 120 Qualifikationsanforderungen für die Certification of 2005-12

Bereiche Bohrtechnik, Brunnenbau professional drilling (DE)
und Brunnenregenerierung companies
DACH-Gütesiegel Gütesiegel für Erdwärmesonden- Certification of 2001/2006
EWS Bohrfirmen professional drilling (CH/DE)
companies
RAL/ZDB RAL-Gütezeichen „Erdwärme“, Certification of 2007
Gütegemeinschaft Geothermische professional drilling (DE)
Anlagen companies
C-Borrare Certifiering av brunnsborrningsföretag Certification of well 2006
drilling companies (SE)

Table 5. Certification for drillers

It is critically important that all site operations are carried out in a safe manner, without
damage to the operators, the public or the environment. Safety requirements can be
summarized by stating that respective national Standards, specifications or statutory
requirements shall be applied wherever respective international Standards are not available
(EN ISO 22475/1).
For quality testing and certification of heat pumps, the basic requirements are given by EN
14511 and, for the domestic hot water side, by EN 255-3. Other relevant heat pump standards
like EN 378 or EN 60335- 2-40 (on electrical safety) are also common throughout Europe.
Quality labels like P-mark in SE or the Gütesiegel Wärmepumpe in AT, DE and CH are based
upon testing according to the common EN standards mentioned above. The European Heat
Pump Association is working to establish a harmonized quality label (EHPA quality label), or
at least to harmonize the existing ones.

IV. 5. Legal permits

One of the commonest barriers to increased use of geothermal energy is the permitting
process. Permits may be required for the use of groundwater as heat source, but also for BHE
and for drilling as such.
Of course, regulations for permits are necessary in order to protect the groundwater and
ground against pollution. A problem is more that the procedures and rationale for decision
making vary greatly not just between member states, but also within countries at provincial
level. In some cases, even the relevant permitting authority is unclear, as the example of
water authorities and mining authorities for larger GSHP-plants in Germany shows. On the
other hand, guidelines for permitting procedures and simplified procedures for small

GEOTRAINET GSHP 163 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

(residential) GSHP in non-critical areas have facilitated the market growth in some German
states and in CH.
The procedure of licensing of GSHP systems varies among European countries. In the field of
permits for geothermal drilling and exploitation, European harmonization could provide an
outline framework with details to be completed at national or even regional level to accord
with local provisions.
For example, German law governs shallow geothermal systems by water law but there are
exceptions where shallow geothermal is governed by mining law. Moreover, the Federal
Mining Act is applied at a federal level and the Federal Water Household Act at a state level
and so it is not obvious which is the relevant authority to address for each application.
Most German states have published own guidelines on how the application and licensing
process should be handled. These publications actually guide the applicant to understand the
procedure and point out the requirements for water protection. Good guidelines provide also
an easy path for GSHP projects below a certain capacity, and in hydrogeologically
unproblematic conditions.
In Austria, the permit for open- and closed-loop GSHP systems is focused on water rights. A
first guideline for application, like those of the German states, has been published in Upper
Austria.
In Greece, given that there is a separate regulation for “systems for heating and cooling by
the exploitation of the heat of underground and groundwater that are not considered as
o
geothermal potential (temperature below 250 C)”, there is no confusion with the Mining Law.
Moreover, there is no further reference to water rights and environmental issues.
According to these indicative cases, it is obvious that the main references to legal permits are
water rights and the exploitation of underground potential.

V. CONCLUSIONS

The introduction of EN standards for heat pumps has been crucial as these products are
manufactured and traded throughout Europe. Barriers for the trade of machinery and
components hardly exist any more within the common market for heat pump systems.
Efficiency or quality labels based on these standards are transparent and comparable among
member states.
Some technical differences for ground-side installations (in particular BHE) and drilling
between Scandinavian countries and Central Europe have their main reason in different
geological situations, and thus cannot easily be harmonized. The Geothermal technology
always has to respect the regional geological situation, which varies widely throughout Europe
and cannot be influenced at all by policy.
Barriers for work and services do exist to some extent, but not more than in the construction
sector in general. Specific certifications are voluntary, and new certifications for heat pump
installers have the chance to become adopted in most of the countries.
The biggest problem is in the legal regulations, concerning both the environmental permits
and the ownership / license for the resource. Without a clear title on the use of the resource,

GEOTRAINET GSHP 164 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

no investment is possible. However, this cannot be regulated by standards, but must be dealt
with by the legislative bodies.
Because the drilling and installation for Geothermal systems in the shallow Geothermal realm
typically is a service rendered by contractors more locally, the need for harmonized standards
is not so urgent as the need for suitable standards at all, as in many countries no guidelines
and standards exist and thus consumer protection is not guaranteed. Here a negative impact
on the market can be expected if demand increases and poor workmanship is delivered in
countries without specific standards.
Common Standards are therefore desirable for the Geothermal side. The first real standard is
under development in Germany and will deal with material, construction and installation of
borehole heat exchangers.
Items to be covered in new European standards for shallow geothermal applications could
include:
o Layout (sizing) of the geothermal system (groundwater wells, borehole heat
exchangers, horizontal loops, etc.), in accordance with the different climatic
and geological conditions within Europe
o Materials for wells, borehole heat exchangers, other pipe loops, manifolds,
etc.
o Geothermal groundwater wells: Drilling, well construction and well completion
o Borehole heat exchangers: Drilling, installation and completion (grouting, or
open completion)
o Pipe laying for horizontal loops
o Other types of ground heat exchangers
o Connection to heat pump or other systems, system integration, interfaces.
o Considering the large differences in climate and geology, standards with a
generic framework for Europe and appendices specific to countries (or
regions) might be an option.
Generally, certification of specialists and GSHP system components will guarantee the quality
and proper operation of GSHP systems and it will help the European market to have a rapid
growth.

VI. FURTHER INFORMATION

Standards
Most standards can be obtained from National Standards organizations that generally have
on-line search and ordering facilities. Free inspection of these Standards is generally not
available and acquisition needs to be made through individual purchase or a subscription
system.

Bibliography

Eugster W., Sanner, B. 2007. Technology status of shallow geothermal energy in Europe.
Proceedings European Geothermal Congress 2007, Unterhaching, Germany.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 165 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 17 EUROPEAN LEGAL SITUATION AND STANDARDS

Mendrinos, D., Karytsas, K., Sanner, B. 2007. Project GROUND-REACH "Reaching the Kyoto
targets by means of a wide introduction of ground coupled heat pumps (GCHP) in the
built environment", Proceedings European Geothermal Congress 2007, Unterhaching,
Germany.

Sanner, B. 2008. Guidelines, standards, certification and legal permits for Ground Source
Heat Pumps in the European Union. Presented during the 9th International IEA Heat
Pump Conference, 20 – 22 May 2008, Zürich, Switzerland.

PROPOSALS FOR IMPROVING GSHP STANDARDS Deliverable 22 Ground-Reach

December 2008. Project GROUND-REACH Contract No.: EIE/05/105/S12.420205.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 166 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18

ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES by Radu Polizu

I. INTRODUCTION
The implementation of a project with an efficient HVAC GSHP system is impossible without
knowledge of the technical details of the project and, at the same time, the legal aspects of
the development. During the engineering activities of such a project (study, design,
implementation, testing commissioning and hand over), the specialists must consider all the
regulatory elements required by the efficiency standards.

Usually, not only among those familiar with the RES domain, but even with specialists, there
is a commonly-held view that an HVAC system with GSHP solution is efficient just because it
extracts from the ground a part of the thermal energy useful for a building.
Two recent EU Directives (EPBD – Energy Performance of Buildings Directive and RESD –
Renewable Energy Sources Directive) have clarified many efficiency aspects in buildings with
HVAC GSHP systems. These directives state that only those applications that have a
seasonal performance factor better than a certain value are efficient. In this chapter, we will
try to clarify what the minimum level of performance is and how we calculate the added
energy from Renewable Energy Sources (RES). We will also define EPBD and RESD in
relation to energy efficiency projects with GSHP HVAC and explain the use of the primary
energy concept as a unifying element between input and output energies.
The information presented here is required from the start of the feasibility study phase for a
GSHP application, and is extremely useful at the stage of monitoring the application, so all
engineering phases involved in a project with GSHP require the concepts and guidelines
presented here to be available.
Across Europe and around the world, the approach to GSHP HVAC systems is in a stage of
maturing. Programming documents adopted by the EU in the last two years are no longer
limited to setting targets/objectives in the field of RES and development of efficient buildings,
but have switched to quantifying the energy produced from RES and to establishing minimum
performance requirements in this domain. As a matter of fact, this new approach has resulted
in the focus coming towards quality and no longer on quantity aspects.
The emergence of the concept “Net Zero Energy Building” in the European regulatory
system, and also in the U.S., required clarification of algorithms that determine whether a
building falls into the category Net Zero Energy or not.

In order to correctly address the requirements of RESD and EPBD provisions, a specialist
needs: thorough understanding of the essence of the two documents; a correct understanding

GEOTRAINET GSHP 167 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

of energy efficiency of the GSHP HVAC application issues, of the coefficient of performance,
the specific requirements of the geographical area in which the project is implemented and
the system requirements in terms of heating and/or cooling. This knowledge allows any
certified specialist in GSHP HVAC to realize sound and efficient projects.
Specialists involved in this activity must be engineers who have a deep understanding of the
concepts of energy, who have taken a training course authorized by a specialized authority
and who were tested by an authorized professional certification structure.
The need for consistent and congruent data provided by a project in the performance
monitoring stage, after the commissioning phase, requires mandatory certification of
specialists involved in this activity.

II. THE DIRECTIVES

To correctly appreciate the quality of a geothermal heat pump project, the two EPBD and
RESD directives that establish the impact of using a low enthalpy geothermal source to the
project building and the calculation methods used for energy economy and CO 2 emission
reduction, need to be examined.

The geothermal demand can be quantified only by a detailed analysis of the building and its
thermal installations, whose main energy source is geothermal energy.
To better understand this mechanism we use the scheme from Figure 1, which shows the
following:
 There is a continuous energy exchange between the building and the exterior
environment, made through the building‟s envelope. The exterior temperature in the
cold season of the year plays the most important role. Direct and diffuse solar
radiation influences significantly the interior air temperature in summer and winter.
The need for fresh air in the building is achieved by ventilation. None of these aspects
can be neglected by the annual energy balance of the building
 The building‟s HVAC system is that system of interior installations that assure the
indoor comfort for the building‟s occupants. The HVAC system contains:
o The heating subsystem
o The domestic hot water subsystem
o The ventilation subsystem
o The cooling subsystem (air conditioning).
The HVAC system, through its subsystems, satisfies the thermal energy demand of the
building, the “Building‟s energy demand”.
Between “building‟s HVAC system out” and “building‟s HVAC system in” there is a value
difference represented by the energy loss of the building‟s HVAC system.
 The building‟s geothermal heat pumps are a part of its HVAC system. Today, most
are electrically driven and so need electrical energy to sustain the ground heat
exchange. In temperate and mainly hot European countries, geothermal heat pumps
are reversible and so have the heating as well as the cooling function. In European

GEOTRAINET GSHP 168 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

countries with mainly cold climate, the heat pumps are used only for heating,
achieving the heating of the building without using the cooling cycle of the thermal
machine.

 Geothermal low enthalpy energy is obtained from the ground by turning the thermal
machine with water evaporator from a closed circuit to an open circuit used for heat
exchange with the ground. In Figure 1, the ground heat exchanger of the building‟s
HVAC system is a closed vertical circuit.

III. DEFINITION OF TERMS IN EPBD AND RESD DIRECTIVES

III. 1. Energy performance of the building

The quality parameter of the building given by the energy effectively consumed or estimated
to be needed to respond to the normal use of the building.

III. 2. The performance need

The minimum level of the building‟s energy performance that needs to be fulfilled so that the
building‟s owner can obtain certain advantages which might include the building‟s construction
authorization, the quality label of the building and the right to rent or the right to sell the
building.

Figure 1. Calculation of building energy performance under the EPBD and RES directives

III. 3. Energy performance Indicator of the building EP

This is a global indicator that represents the algebraic weighted sum of the energy supplied to
the building from the exterior for all types of energy (for example: the building in Figure 1 uses
two energy types: electrical and geothermal).

GEOTRAINET GSHP 169 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

III. 4. Ways to express the performance indicator

2
 By the annual primary energy specific use value for the building [kWh/m yr]
 By the green house specific emissions value produced by the building‟s HVAC
2
system sources [kg CO2/m yr].

III. 5. Primary energy

Is that energy that has not been subjected to any conversion or transforming process and
comes from energy sources as:
 Nonrenewable: fossil fuels, nuclear energy
 Renewable: defined in RES Directive.

III. 6. Electrical energy conversion factor to primary energy in the community space
For electrical heat pumps, according to the November 9, 2007 Decision published in The
European Union Official Journal - L301/14 November 20, 2007, the electrical energy
conversion factor to primary energy has a value of:
(1) fEE = 2.5

this means that:

(2) 1 kWh electrical energy = 2.5 kWh primary energy

This Decision is based on a European median production yield for electrical energy, including
the loss from the distribution network, having a value of:

(3) ηtot = 0.4 average yield for the production of electricity in the European
Community (Annex II Directive 2006/32/EC)

Figure 2. Flowchart of the energy chain to provide electricity to the final consumer

By the same Commission‟s Decision, the European median yield for natural gas used as a
thermal energy producing source, has a value of:

(4) ηgas = 0.91 average yield for natural gas energy conversion in final
consumer energy

This value concerns the natural gas distribution system loss and allows the calculation of the
conversion factor of the natural gas energy to primary energy:

GEOTRAINET GSHP 170 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

(5) fgas = 1.1 = 1/ ηgas= 1.1 conversion factor of the natural gas energy to
primary energy (Official Journal of the European Union L114/76:
27.4.2006)
To determine the conversion factor values mentioned above, the 2006/32/CE Directive of the
European Parliament and of the Europe Council from April 5 2006, regarding the energy
efficiency to the final consumers and the energy services, was taken into consideration.

III. 7. Energy Performance of Buildings Indicator as primary energy

This expresses the annual specific use of primary energy of the building epin reported in
conditioned area and is calculated using the formula:
2
(6) epin [kWh/m yr] = Epin [kWh/yr] / Ac [m2]
where:
- Epin [kWh/yr] is the annual energy use of the building expressed as primary energy
2
- Ac [m ] is the conditioned surface of the building established according to the
standard and represents the sum of the surfaces of the rooms‟ floors that use the HVAC
system. Not included here is the uninhabited space, such as unheated rooms - basements,
attics and storage rooms.

III. 8. Energy Performance of Buildings Indicator as greenhouse gas emissions

This expresses the specific pollutant greenhouse gas emission GES reported in conditioned
area of the building and is calculated using the formula:
2 2
(7) GES [kg CO2/m yr] = m CO2 [kg CO2/yr] / Ac [m ]
where:
- m CO2 [kg CO2/yr] is the green house gas emissions sum calculated in equivalent
kg CO2/yr.
The GES emission factor specific to electrical energy production at a community level,
resulting from the weighted calculation of the national emission factors for European
Community countries has a value of:

(8) fEE = 0.486 kg CO2/kWh

The GES emission factor, specific to natural gas burning in boilers for producing hot water
has a value of:

(9) fNG = 0.29 kg CO2/kWh

III. 9. Energy from renewable sources

The energy from renewable sources is known as ERES [kWh/yr] and is the non fossil energy
used by the building‟s HVAC system to satisfy its energy demands. The energy that comes
from renewable sources includes wind energy, solar, aero-thermal, geothermal, hydrothermal,
ocean energy, hydropower or the energy of falling water, biomass gases and biogases
coming from organic and fermentable city waste treatment plants.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 171 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

The group of geothermal, aero-thermal and hydrothermal energy represents the energy
stored as heat under the Earth‟s surface, in the air and in the surface water of the Earth
(lakes, seas, oceans, etc.).

III. 10. Building’s energy demand

The building‟s energy demand is known as Qdemand or Epout [kWh/yr] and represents the
weighted sum of the HVAC building‟s subsystems energy demand.

(10) Qdemand = QdemandH + QdemandDHW + QdemandV + QdemandAC [kWh/yr]

where:
- QdemandH [kWh/yr] = heating subsystem‟s energy demand
- QdemandDHW [kWh/yr] =domestic hot water producing subsystem‟s energy demand
- QdemandV [kWh/yr] = ventilating subsystem‟s energy demand
- QdemandAC [kWh/yr] = cooling subsystem‟s energy demand.

III. 11. Energy demand for the building’s HVAC system

The energy available to satisfy the building demand is known as Qusable [kWh/yr] or Epin
[kWh/yr] and to calculate it we need to appreciate the energy loss of the building‟s HVAC
subsystems, noted as Qnr [kWh/yr].
The calculation formula for Qusable is:
(11) Qusable = QdemandH + QdemandDHW + QdemandV + QdemandAC + Qnr [kWh/yr]
or:
(12) Qusable = Qdemand + Qnr
Each term of equation (11) is determined by a specific technology. For example, for QdemandH
the EN 15316-1:2007 Standard was established, based on various software packages
(Energy Plus; TRNSYS; TRACE 700 Load Design, etc.) officially agreed by each community,
software that can be amalgamated to a single software for all community countries.
When a building‟s HVAC system is reduced only to heating and hot water production,
equation (11) becomes:

(13) Qusable = QdemandH + QdemandDHW + Qnr [kWh/yr]

where Qnr [kWh/yr] represents the annual energy loss of the heating and domestic hot water
subsystems.

III. 12. Electrical energy use for the building’s HVAC system
Called ΣEdriving [kWh/yr].
In a HVAC heat pumps system, the electrical energy use” ΣEdriving” has two components:
o The annual energy required to run the heat pumps and when using 1÷n heat pumps,
the size of the first component is:
n HP
(14) Σ i=1 Edriving i [kWh/yr]

GEOTRAINET GSHP 172 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

o The annual energy use for running all the other components of the building‟s HVAC
system, excepting the heat pumps. This component represents the sum of energy
use for the circulating pumps, fans and fan-coil units for heating and cooling:
n pumps n fancoils
(15) Σ i=1 Edriving ,Σ i=1 Edriving

So, we can write:

n HP n pumps
(16) ΣEdriving = Σ i=1 Edriving i + (Σ i=1 Edriving + …..)

Equation (15) helps us assess the annual electrical energy use by the HVAC system for those
two components:

o The first term of equation (16) represents a “positive” use of electrical energy because
without electrical energy, we cannot extract primary energy from a renewable source.
Moreover, the calorific equivalent for the annual active energy for the heat pumps can
be found a useful component of heat in the building‟s HVAC system
o The second term of equation (16) represents a loss within the HVAC system, and it is
best that, in HVAC heat pump-based systems, all the terms in brackets be as small
as possible and not bigger or equal to 10% of the ΣEdriving value.
Having made this assessment, we can re-write equation (16) as:
n HP driving
(17) ΣEdriving = Σ i=1 Edriving i + Qnr [kWh/yr]
driving
where Qnr represents the energy loss resulting from using energy in running the electrical
equipments of the HVAC subsystems. Meaning:
driving n pumps n fancoil
(18) Qnr =Σ i=1 Edriving + (Σ i=1 Edriving + …..)

In the case of using GSHP and respecting a loss limit of 10%, we can write:
driving
(19) Qnr = 0.1 ΣEdriving [kWh/yr]

or:
n HP
(20) ΣEdriving = 1.1 Σ i=1Edriving i [kWh/yr]

In other applications with aero-thermal or hydrothermal heat pumps, the source temperature
depends on the variable exterior air temperature for covering the energy needs of the building
and is possible only by using additional sources of energy (see reference [1] in section V!)
from fossil sources such as electrical energy, natural gas and liquefied fuel.
Additional sources of energy quantum raise the value ΣEdriving by increasing the value of Qnr
when the heating energy supplement is electrical:
driving resistor
(21) Qnr = Qnr + Qnr [kWh/yr]

GEOTRAINET GSHP 173 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

or:
driving resistor
(22) Qnr = Qnr + Qnr + Qfuel [kWh/yr]

when the heating energy supplement is both electrical and from additional fuel.

III. 13. The renewable energy contribution delivered to the building

For the renewable energy group, using heat pumps, geothermal, aero-thermal and
hydrothermal energy, the RES Directive established in VII Annex the following relation:

(23) ERES = Qusable (1-1/SPF) [kWh/yr]

where:
- ERES is the annual renewable energy obtained by using heat pumps
- Qusable is the energy demand of the building‟s HVAC system, calculated according to
equation (11).
SPF is the seasonal performance factor of the building‟s HVAC system, defined as:

(24) SPF = Qusable / Σ Edriving [-]

where:
- Σ Edriving represents, when using geothermal heat pumps, the annual total electrical
energy used by the HVAC system to cover the heating, domestic hot water,
ventilating and air conditioning.
Equation (24) is relatively easy to use because Q usable can be obtained using specialized
software that simulates the energy use of the building for a year and Σ Edriving is the sum of
monthly electrical energy meter readings for the building‟s HVAC system. The responsibility
for determining Qusable is given to an authorized person, called the Energy Auditor established
by EPBD provisions and who functions independently. The responsibility for determining the
theoretical variations of the energy required by the HVAC subsystems lies with the designer of
the building‟s HVAC system.
An analysis for the annual thermal behaviour of a building from Romania is shown in Figure 3.
The building is located in an urban area, which has a re-designed HVAC system using
reversible heat pumps with a thermal ground source, after the model shown in Figure 1.
Figure 3 shows that SPF is a dynamic performance factor that synthesizes precisely the
building‟s energy performance. It is observed that SPF has a maximum value in summer,
when the heat pumps are used as chillers and a minimum value in the transition period
between the cold and hot seasons of the year.
Using the seasonal factor (determined monthly and on both cold [Oct-Dec and Jan-Apr] and
hot [Apr-Oct] periods of the year in the analyzed case) an average value is established,
termed:

APF=SPFyr annual performance factor

APF is determined by integrating the monthly current values.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 174 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

Figure 3. Graphic representation of the monthly energy variations used to calculate

the energy performance of the building and the seasonal performance factor

IV. SPF AND APF MINIMUM VALUES USED BY THE HVAC-GSHP DESIGNERS

For the GSHP designer, the Borehole Heat Exchanger (BHE) required for calculation are:
 Monthly variation of the power and energy from the HVAC system
 Heat pump performance.
Both are linked by the energy variation given by Σ Edriving. This variable appears in the
equations:

(25) Qusable = ERES + Σ Edriving [kWh/yr]

(26) Σ Edriving = Qusable / SPF [kWh/yr]

If we eliminate the variable Σ Edriving from equation (25), using equation (26), we obtain:

(27) Qusable = ERES + Qusable / SPF [kWh/yr]

or:

(28) ERES = Qusable (1-1/SPF) [kWh/yr]

Equation (28) tells us that the annual renewable energy variation that BHE needs to provide
to the building‟s HVAC-GSHP system depends on the HVAC system energy demand and the
seasonal performance factor variation.
So, the GSHP Designer must know and integrate into this assessment the lower limits of the
seasonal performance factor as called for by the EC Legislation.
Those two EU directives that make up the “Energy-Efficiency Building Codes” are extremely
severe and not every heat pump application of GSHP type is successful by these criteria. So,

GEOTRAINET GSHP 175 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

according to VII Annex – RES Directive: “only those natural environment heat pump
applications that satisfy the condition (29) will be acceptable”:

(29) SPFHP > 1.15 x 1/ ηtot

If ηtot is given by formula formula (3), then

(30) SPFHP > 2.875

The annual average SPFHP, called APF by the RES Directive, can be seen in Figure 3 where
the application analyzed respects equation (30) as in the Community Legislation and the SPF
values are above the minimum limit of 2.875.
Further, the EPB Directive, (see [2] in Section VI) defines the “NET-ZERO” ENERGY
BUILDING which is a building that, as a result of a very high level of energy efficiency, has an
annual total use equal to or smaller than the energy production from renewable sources. This
condition means:

(31) ERES ≥ 2.5 ΣEdriving

If we consider that by definition SPF = Q usable / ΣEdriving, we obtain:

(32) ERES ≥ 2.5 Qusable / SPF

If we combine equations (32) and (28), we obtain Qusable (1-1/SPF) ≥ 2.5 Qusable / SPF:

(33) SPFmin EPB Directive (Recast) ≥ 3.5 for geothermal heat pumps with
ground water or surface water source and ≥ 3.75 for ground source
(htpp://www.wp-effizienz.ise.fraunhofer.de/german/index)

In Figure 3, we can see that even if APF in the analyzed application has a value of over 3.5,
we still have values of the SPF in the cold season of the year below the limit set by (33).
However, the building can still be placed in the category NET-ZERO ENERGY BUILDING,
because the average of the SPF values in the cold season (Oct-Dec and Jan-Apr) is greater
than 3.5.
RES
If we continue our analysis with EP as the part of the primary energy remaining from ERES
after we subtract the used electrical energy value (ΣE driving in primary energy units) we have
the expressions:
RES
(34) EP = Qusable (1-1/SPF)[1-1.5/(SPF-1)] [kWh/yr]
RES
(35) EP = ERES [1-1.5/(SPF-1)] [kWh/an]
Both (34) and (35) help us analyze more widely the settings presented above. So:

 If SPF = 1, then ERES = 0. This outcome makes no sense

RES
 If SPF = 2.5, then ERES = 0.6 Qusable and EP = 0. This variant has no primary energy
available after allowing for the used electrical energy value in the building‟s HVAC
system. This application of natural environment heat pumps is not acceptable in
Europe
RES
 If SPF ≥ 2.875, then ERES ≥ 0.65 Qusable and EP ≥ 0.2 ERES. This is the minimal
condition set by the RES Directive by VII Annex. The primary energy available from

GEOTRAINET GSHP 176 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

renewable sources, after allowing for electrical energy use, must be a minimum of
20% of the renewable energy value. In the SPF range 2.5-2.875, the building
equipped with natural environment heat pumps uses less primary energy than it
produces, but is not acceptable by RES
RES
 If SPF ≥ 3.5, then ERES ≥ 0.71 Qusable and EP ≥ 0.4 ERES. European buildings built
this way, using renewable energy sources can be called “NET-ZERO” ENERGY
BUILDINGS that produce over 40% more primary energy than they consume from
fossil sources.
RES
Figure 4 shows graphically the EP function represented in equation (32). The figure
includes SPF and APF values which show projects of a level of construction and exploitation,
by hydrothermal and geothermal heat pumps, in three categories. These are:
o UNACCEPTABLE – where SPF, APF <2.875
o ACCEPTABLE – where 2.875 ≤ SPF, APF <3.5
o GOOD and NEARLY-ZERO – where SPF, APF ≥3.5 for hydrothermal heat pumps
and >3.75 for geothermal heat pumps.

Figure 4. Minimal performances of the technical building‟s systems that use natural
environment heat pumps, according to RES Directive 2009 and EPB Directive Recast 2009

So, it is not enough that APF is within the limits set by a certain category, but it is necessary
that the seasonal values, established by the average of the monthly values, are above these
limits.

V. THE COP AND REE PERFORMANCES SET FOR THE AMBIENT ENVIRONMENT
SOURCE HEAT PUMPS

“SPF” is a dynamic performance factor varying by month, season and year to year, which
depends on the “fixed point” performance for the building‟s HVAC system heat pumps.
The “fixed point performance” of a heat pump means the response of a heat pump when
tested under factory conditions. Heat pump performance certification is based on
EUROVENT.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 177 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

The Commission Decision from November 9, 2007, regarding the establishment of ecological
criteria to support ecological labelling for electrical heat pumps is limited to a heating capacity
of maximum 100 kW. This capacity effectively covers the maximum thermal power of heat
pumps sold in Europe. This group of products does not include:
o Heat pumps for producing exclusively domestic hot water
o Heat pumps used exclusively for extracting heat from a building and evacuating it into
the air, soil or water, for cooling the building.

The performance of a heat pump is established by determining:

o The coefficient of performance (COP) that represents the relationship between the
heating power and electrical energy use for a given source and a certain obtained
temperature
o The efficiency rate (REE) that represents the relationship between the refrigeration
power and electrical energy use for a given source and a certain given temperature.

To establish which of the natural environment heat pumps can be considered in designing
HVAC heat pumps systems to be included in the RES Directive provisions (SPFmin = 2.875)
we use Table 1 (COP) and Table 2 (EER) from the Commission Decision Annex and we
select either a high efficiency or a low efficiency thermal pump.

VI. PRIMARY ENERGY REPORTING OBTAINED IN GEOTHERMAL HEAT PUMP

APPLICATIONS

The purpose of measurements foreseen in the EPB Directive (Recast) is to obtain primary
energy over the energy use from fossil sources in all natural environment heat pump
applications destined for new buildings but also when modernizing a major part of an existing
building. In the case of new buildings, the use of renewable energy is compulsory.

Germany, in anticipating the provisions of the European Parliament and Council, introduced,
on January 1 2009, a Law proposing renewable sources in the heating sector (section IX [3])
and from April 30, 2009 the second part of the Law regarding the building‟s energy efficiency
[4]. In January 2007, the European Commission proposed a package ENERGY-CLIMATE
aiming to reduce energy consumption and greenhouse gas emissions by 20% and to increase
the amount of renewable energy by 20% by 2020.
The complete implementation deadline by the Public Authorities of the measures foreseen in
2
EPB Directive (Recast) is December 31, 2010 (for all buildings with a surface >250 m ).
The documents quoted above give the obligation for each EU member state to ensure an
independent control mechanism to guarantee the Energy Performance of the Building
Certificates. These Certificates are required to clearly state the annual specific consumption
of renewable energy and the primary energy economy.
As an example of the primary energy obtained when using geothermal heat pumps, we will
analyze the case of a building design whose energy results were presented in Figure 3.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 178 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

The building in our example [2] has a monthly energy need for heating, ventilating and air
conditioning as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5. Monthly energy demand of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning subsystems
2
of a residential building of P+ 4 floors, Ac = 5363 m , located in Bucharest Romania

By using the conversion 1Wh = 3600 J, we obtain:

36 Qdemand H+V = 447 MWh/yr

Qdemand AC = 194 MWh/yr

For the number of inhabitants, it was determined that:

37 Qdemand DHW = 93 MWh/yr

In the project feasibility study, it was determined that for the building in our example, there are
two solutions for the building‟s HVAC system as follows:

 The typical HVAC system, based on fossil energy sources, which has the demand for
heating, ventilating and domestic hot water which are assured by burning natural gas
in a thermal power plant with a useful thermal capacity of 250 kW. The cold needs of
the building are achieved by installing a chiller on the building‟s roof, with an air-
cooled condenser. The thermal balance of this system can be seen in Figure 6. The
HVAC system has an annual energy demand Qusable of 820 MWh/yr, 668 MWh/yr from
natural gas (approximately 82%) and 152 MWh/yr from electrical energy. Thermal
loss of the building‟s HVAC system Qnr is 280 MWh/yr (approximately 34%)
 A geothermal HVAC system based on installing a BHE (Borehole Heat Exchange =
Ground Source Heat Exchange) having a renewable thermal capacity of 600 MWh/yr,
made up of 360 MWh/yr for heating and 232 MWh/yr for cooling. The 70 boreholes of
70 m depth are installed at a depth of 2 m under the green space of the building. The

GEOTRAINET GSHP 179 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

thermal balance of the system is presented in Figure 7. The HVAC system has an
annual energy need Q usable of 799 MWh/yr of which ERES represents 600 MWh/yr and
electrical energy 199 MWh/yr. Thermal loss of the building‟s HVAC system Qnr is 65
MWh/yr (approximately 8%).

Figure. 6. Thermal balance of a typical HVAC system

Figure 7. Thermal balance of a geothermal HVAC system

These two options are summarized in Table 1.

Analyzing the data from Table 1, we can see that:
 The geothermal source produces a total of 600 MWh/yr primary energy, out of which
199 x 2.5 -199 = 298 MWh/yr must be deducted as the electrical energy used by the
2
building‟s HVAC system. A primary energy surplus of 302 MWh/yr (56 kWh/m yr)
remains which is entered into the calculation of the annual specific energy use of the
2
building, whose value is 149 kWh/m yr

GEOTRAINET GSHP 180 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

 By replacing the HVAC classic system with a geothermal one, the energy
performance of the same building is increased by 30% and the building is moved from
“B” class to a superior energy class “A”, and the specific greenhouse gas emission
drops by a factor of 2.8.

Energy performance The building using a The building using a

indicator of the building classic HVAC system geothermal HVAC system

The specific annual primary The natural gas specific use The specific energy use from
energy consumption for in primary energy units: renewable source using (35)
normal use of the building epgas= 137 kWh/m yr
2 for an SPF=799/199=4.02
2 RES 2
[kWh/m yr] ep =56 kWh/m yr

The specific energy use in The specific energy use in

primary energy units: primary energy units:

2
Σepdriving= 71 kWh/m yr
2 Σepdriving= 93 kWh/m yr

The energy performance of The energy performance of

the building in primary the building in primary

energy units. The annual energy units. The annual

specific energy use: specific energy use:

RES
epgas+Σepdriving=208 ep + Σepdriving=149
2
2 kWh/m yr
kWh/m yr

The specific greenhouse gas The specific emission for the

emissions produced by the natural gas:
building‟s HVAC system GESCO2=36 kg CO2/m yr
2
*
sources
The specific emission of the The specific emission of the
electrical energy use: electrical energy use:
2
[kg CO2/ m yr] GESEE=(152,000 kWh/yr) / 2
GESEE=18 kg CO2/m yr
2
(5363 m ) x 0.486
2
GESEE=14 kg CO2/m yr
The energy performance of
The energy performance of the building:
the building:
GES= GESEE
GES=GESCO2+GESEE 2
= 18 kg CO2/m yr
2
= 50 kg CO2/m yr

Table 1.

The primary energy saving and emission reduction is calculated as:

o The primary energy saving = (the annual specific primary energy use from the
HVAC classic system plus the annual specific primary energy use, equivalent

GEOTRAINET GSHP 181 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

to the annual electrical energy use covered the provision of the HVAC
2
geothermal system) x 5363 m = 1,614,263 kWh/yr = 1,614 MWh/yr.
If we want to express the saving of primary energy in equivalent petroleum
tons, we use the conversion factor:
1Mtoe = 11.63 MWh. This way, the primary energy economy in the analyzed
2 2·
case is: 139 Mtoe/yr or 26 Ktoe/m yr, the equivalent of 300 kWh/m yr
primary energy
o The reduction of the greenhouse gas emissions = (GES in the case of a
building with classic HVAC system minus GES in the case of a building with a
2 2 2
geothermal HVAC system) x Ac [m ] = (50 kg CO2/ m yr - 18 CO2/ m yr) x
2 2
5363 m = 171,616 CO2/yr = 172 t CO2/yr or 32 kg CO2/ m yr.

The saving of 172 t CO2/yr represents the equivalent of an urban bus in a European capital,
driving more than 1 million km.

VII. ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND ECONOMIC COST BENEFITS

The content of this chapter presents the algorithm for the evaluation of the energy efficiency
of a project with GSHP HVAC, based on the framework defined by EPBD and RESD.
Proper application of the algorithm described in this chapter gives the entrepreneur/investor
the capacity to adopt an efficient GSHP HVAC solution, so that the produced RES energy
which exceeds the input energy from conventional sources will represent the
contribution/savings/real intake of GSHP applications.
EPBD and RESD clarify this issue at European level. German law in this matter correctly
anticipated the described European legislation, presenting the correct methods and algorithm
which should be followed.

VIII. CONCLUSIONS

The designer needs to be aquainted with the following issues:

 EPBD - the energy performance criteria of the building
 The HVAC with GSHP system is a subsystem of the building
 The building and its HVAC GSHP system are classified as a single entity
 The energy classification is based on the annual specific consumption of primary
energy [kWh/yr]
 The GSHP system produces primary energy
 RESD requires that the primary energy from renewable sources should replace
energy used by the building‟s HVAC system using fossil source
 A HVAC with GSHP system efficiency control is made by the calculation of SPF
 The RES Directive requires that SPF ≥ 2.875
 EPBD Recast introduces the NET-ZERO ENERGY BUILDING (NZEB) concept that
represents the next decade‟s target for Europe and the USA

GEOTRAINET GSHP 182 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY BUILDING CODES

 In the next decade, all new buildings, residential and non-residential, should use
renewable energy sources
 A building will be placed in the NZEB Category if its seasonal performance
coefficients are greater than the 3.5 value that assures >70% of the total annual
thermal energy use of the building is renewable energy.
The main consequences of incorrect or incomplete use of these concepts are:
 In the short term – The design / implementation of an energy-inefficient GSHP
solution
 In the medium and long term – Higher operation costs for the entire building
lifecycle, not only compared to a high quality RES solution, but also compared to a
classic HVAC solution.
The next step is for the presented EPBD and RESD provisions to be included into national
regulation frameworks, rules and procedures. The fulfilment of this step is the guarantee that,
in the future, the HVAC GSHP projects will increase efficiency in heating / cooling systems,
producing energy savings and positive environmental impacts.

IX. FURTHER INFORMATION

Bibliography
[1] ASHRAE JOURNAL – February 2009 – Heat Pumps for Cold Climates – Kurt Roth, PhD; John
Diesckmann and Jumes Brodrick, Ph.D.

[2] Eng. Radu POLIZU, Ph. D – “NET-ZERO” Energy Buildings – Uppsala, Sweden, 10-12 June 2009

[3] Act on the Promotion of Renewable Energies in the Heat Sector ( Erneuerbare-Energien-
Wärmegesetz EEWärmeG), Bundesgesetzblatt Jahrgang 2008 Teil I Nr.36 vom 18.
August 2008, S. 1658.

[4] Bundesgesetzblatt Jahrgang 2009 Teil Nr. 23, ausgegeben zu Bonn am 30 April 2009.
Verordnung zur Änderung der Energie-Einsparverordnung.
[5] ASHRAE JOURNAL – Sept 2009 – Targeting Net-Zero Energy.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 183 Manual for Designers

GEOTRAINET GSHP 184 Manual for Designers
 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 19

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES by Burkhard Sanner

I. INTRODUCTION

Environmental aspects in respect to the protection of ground and groundwater are of

paramount importance in any shallow geothermal project. The main environmental problems
associated with GSHP can be categorized as follows:
Impact on ground and groundwater:
- leakage of antifreeze or refrigerant
- connecting different aquifers or connecting aquifers to surface (quality of
grouting / long-term tightness)
- drilling into artesian aquifers
- thermal effects.
Other impacts:
- There can also be other adverse effects due to swelling clays, anhydrite, etc.
- Pollution by a rig from a polluted drilling site, not properly cleaned.

II. LEAKAGE

Leakage of closed systems (horizontal or vertical

loops) has to be avoided at all costs. It will render the
relevant loop unusable and might cause
environmental problems in cases where the fluid
escapes from inside the pipes and is then hazardous
to groundwater. Two precautions must be taken:

- All steps in the production and installation of a

ground loop must be designed for optimum tightness
and longevity of the loop; installation procedures must
be set up in such a way that the danger of damage of
the pipe during installation is minimized (for instance
using a reel hanging from the drill rig above the
borehole to install a BHE into that hole, (Fig. 1).

Figure 1. Installation of a BHE from a reel

hanging above the borehole

- Heat carrier fluids must be selected in such a

way that the possible impact to the groundwater after

GEOTRAINET GSHP 185 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 19 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

leakage is minimized, i.e. the fluids should be non-toxic and easily biodegradable. The
ideal heat carrier from both the environmental and thermodynamic perspective is pure
water. Alas, in most of central and northern Europe water can hardly be used for closed
loops, as the design temperatures in winter typically are below 0 °C. So, an antifreeze
has to be added to achieve a lower freezing temperature; Table 1 gives details on some
antifreeze agents.

Name Percentage Freezing point

Monoethylenglycol 25 % -14 °C

Monoethylenglycol 33 % -21 °C

Monopropylenglycol 25 % -10 °C

Monopropylenglycol 33 % -17 °C

Ethanol 25 % -15 °C

Salt (brines):

Potassium carbonate 25 % -13 °C

Potassium carbonate 33 % -20 °C

Calcium chloride 20 % -18 °C

Table 1. List of some suitable antifreeze agents; water-antifreeze mixtures with the amount of
antifreeze given in column “percentage”

III. CONNECTING AQUIFERS

For a shallow geothermal drilling it is esential that aquifers are not connected to the surface,
nor should aquifers at different depths be connected with each other. Connection to the
surface can be prevented by grouting the BHE, or by cementation of the annulus in the case
of a well. In Scandinavia, keeping the hole open and just sealing it to the ground surface is a
widely accepted practice explained e.g. in the Swedish guideline “Normbrunn 07”. However,
even in Sweden for difficult situations, like saltwater intrusion into the soil from the sea,
grouting meanwhile is recommended.
To prevent the connection of aquifers to each other (Fig. 2), again a good grouting is required.
In difficult cases, even a “BHE packer” can be used to seal the borehole, as patented recently
in Switzerland (Fig. 3). For wells, the well screen must not extend through the boundary of
different groundwater aquifers.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 186 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 19 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

soil, weathered zone

clay (aquitard)

sand/gravel (aquifer)

fine sand (poor aquifer)

soil, weathered zone

sedimentary layers
Figure 2. Geological (sandstone,marl,
situations with limestone, etc.)

possible problems in
respect to connection
to the surface (above)
or problems with
Horst structure Graben structure
connecting different
aquifers (right)

Figure 3. Schematic diagram of the “BHE packer” as supplied by Haka Gerodur, Switzerland
(from the relevant EU patent application EP 1 865 146 A1)

IV. ARTESIAN GROUNDWATER

An artesian well or spring produces water at the surface without the need for pumping. The
principle schematic diagram is shown in Figure 4. The reason for the free outflow is that the
catchment area (where water infiltrates the ground) is higher than the ground surface at the
site considered, and that impermeable layers prevent the water from rising towards the
surface.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 187 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 19 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

catchement
area

well in confined
aquifer
artesian well

clay (aquitard)

sand/gravel (aquifer)

Figure 4. Schematic diagram of a confined and of an artesian well

For some regions, GIS data provided via the internet allow an assessment for the risk of
artesian groundwater (Fig. 5). In the maps, both the known artesian wells or springs as well
as the area with possible hazard are shown. As a clear rule it can be said: never try to install a
BHE in an artesian aquifer! Grouting will not be enough to keep the water from migrating (this
would be possible just for small overpressure). Artesian wells can be quite a spectacle (Fig.
6).

Figure 5. Map from GIS for

shallow geothermal in the
German state Baden-
Wuerttemberg, showing
known artesian wells/springs
(blue squares) and areas
with potential hazard of
artesian water (blue
shading);
(from: http://www1.lgrb.uni-
freiburg.de/isong/)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 188 Manual for Designers

 SECTION G. REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 19 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

Figure 6. Artesian aquifer perforated in

Hoechst (near Frankfurt); large amount
of water pressing through the drill pipe

It is not necessary for the groundwater level to be fully artesian (i.e. the pressure head would
be above ground level) to cause trouble. Also confined aquifers with a pressure head slightly
below ground surface can flood a construction pit, underground parking, or similar, if the
drilling was done from the bottom of the excavation. Examples exist in many places; in
Frankfurt (Germany) both a construction pit and underground parking have been flooded from
geothermal drilling during the last 10 years, in different projects.
Artificial groundwater drawdown might also fool the driller. Often the water table near a
construction site is lowered by pumping to enable work in a pit. Drilling wells or BHE in such a
pit and not sealing the perforation will result in flooding of the pit (or the basement or
underground parking, respectively, that might have been constructed in the pit after drilling)
once the pumping to lower the water table has been stopped after all work is finished.

V. SWELLING ROCKS

Severe damage might be caused by rocks which swell under the presence of water. This
damage starts very slowly, but cannot be stopped once it has been started. Rocks susceptible
to swelling include:
 Clay and marl with 3-layer-clay minerals
 Anhydrite
In southwestern Germany a small city is endangered by ground movements due to anhydrite
in contact with groundwater after geothermal drilling (Fig. 7). Anhydrite (CaSO4) is slowly
transformed into gypsum (CaSO4 * 10 H2O), which is accompanied by a considerable growth
in size of the mineral.

GEOTRAINET GSHP 189 Manual for Designers

SECTION G. REGULATIONS

CHAPTER 19 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

Figure 7. Rate of upheaval in the Suebian city Staufen, started after geothermal drilling
accessed a layer of anhydrite (Map RP Freiburg); (right) view of the old city with the damaged
area (photos: I. Sass)

GEOTRAINET GSHP 190 Manual for Designers

GEOTRAINET GSHP 191 Manual for Designers
 The GEOTRAINET Training Manual

The GEOTRAINET project: Geo-Education for a sustainable geothermal heating and

cooling market, supported by Intelligent Energy – Europe, has delivered this Training
Manual for Designers of Shallow Geothermal Systems. It was overseen by the
European representative organizations for geologists and for geothermal energy.
This manual has been developed for European designers of shallow geothermal
systems and it is intended to provide relevant and accessible support for their ongoing
education. It is based on the curriculum developed by an international platform of
experts from this sector over the period of the project.
Training courses and meetings were held by partners drawn from universities,
research organizations and commercial organizations from across Europe in Belgium,
Austria, France, Germany, Ireland, Romania, Spain, Sweden and the UK. The course
covers all matters from concept and feasibility, through design and integration to
installation and regulation.
The manual is designed as the course text for a formal training programme in the
design of shallow geothermal systems, including practical demonstrations and real
case studies based on experience. Successful completion of the GEOTRAINET
training will lead to the award of a European certificate, for which a system of
European accreditation has been proposed as part of the project.

For ongoing support and information see the GEOTRAINET website:

www.geotrainet.eu

GEOTRAINET GSHP 192 Manual for Designers